Manual Toshiba TEC FS-2600-1 SERIES (page 195 of 210) (English)

TEC Electronic Cash Register

FS-2600-1 SERIES

Owner’s Manual

S/A Operators Guide

S/A Manager's Guide

M/S Level Operator's Guide

M/S Level Manager's Guide

by TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION

570 Ohito, Ohito-cho, Tagata-gun, Shizuoka-ken, JAPAN

WARNING

“This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing

Equipment Regulations.”

“Cet appareil numénque de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel

brouilleur du Canada.”

NOTICE

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital

device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reason-

able protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commer-

cial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy

and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful

interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is

likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the

interference at his own expense. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by

manufacturer for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

1. STAND-ALONE LEVEL

OPERATOR’S GUIDE

Table of Contents

EO1-11138

FS-2600-1 SERIES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

1. INTRODUCTION...............................................................................................1-1

1.1 Applicable Model .............................................................................................................1-1

1.2 Accessories .....................................................................................................................1-1

2. SPECIFICATION ..............................................................................................2-1

2.1 ECR .................................................................................................................................2-1

2.2 Hardware Option..............................................................................................................2-2

3. APPEARANCE AND NOMENCLATURE.........................................................3-1

3.1 Front View........................................................................................................................3-1

3.2 Rear View ........................................................................................................................3-2

4. MODE LOCK AND MODE SELECTOR KEYS ................................................4-1

4.1 Mode Lock .......................................................................................................................4-1

4.2 Mode Selector Keys.........................................................................................................4-1

5. DISPLAY...........................................................................................................5-1

5.1 Operator Display ..............................................................................................................5-1

5.2 Customer Display ............................................................................................................5-3

6. KEYBOARD......................................................................................................6-1

6.1 Keyboard Layout..............................................................................................................6-1

6.2 Functions of Each Key .....................................................................................................6-2

7. PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION .............................................................7-1

8. CASHIER SIGNING OR CASHIER KEY OPERATIONS .................................8-1

8.1 Code Entry Method..........................................................................................................8-1

8.2 Cashier Key Method ([CLK] Keys) ..................................................................................8-2

8.3 Training Mode Start and End ...........................................................................................8-3

8.4 “Cashier Exclusive” Option ..............................................................................................8-4

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES ...............................................................................9-1

9.1 Receipt-Issue/Non-issue Selection ..................................................................................9-2

9.2 Store Message Display ....................................................................................................9-2

9.3 No-sale ............................................................................................................................9-2

9.4 Loan .................................................................................................................................9-3

9.5 Check Cashing (No-sale cashing of a non-cash media)..................................................9-4

9.6 No-sale Exchange from Foreign Currency to Domestic Currency ...................................9-4

9.7 No-sale Exchange from Domestic Currency to Foreign Currency ...................................9-5

TOC 2

EO1-11138

FS-2600-1 SERIES

9.8 PLU (menu item) Entry through the Keyboard.................................................................9-5

9.9 PLU (menu item) Entry through the Menu Window .........................................................9-6

9.10 Repeat Entry ....................................................................................................................9-7

9.11 Quantity Extension (Multiplication) ..................................................................................9-7

9.12 Set Menu Entry ................................................................................................................9-8

9.13 Modifier Entry...................................................................................................................9-9

9.14 Other Income PLU Entry..................................................................................................9-9

9.15 PLU Code Shift Entry.....................................................................................................9-10

9.16 PLU Price Shift Entry .....................................................................................................9-10

9.17 Combo (Combination) Sale Entry ..................................................................................9-11

9.18 Scale Entry ....................................................................................................................9-11

9.19 Subtotal Read ................................................................................................................9-12

9.20 Tray Total Read .............................................................................................................9-13

9.21 Item Correct ...................................................................................................................9-14

9.22 Void (Designated Line Voiding and Returned Merchandise) .........................................9-14

9.23 All Void...........................................................................................................................9-15

9.24 Order Entry Control........................................................................................................9-15

9.25 Order Entry Control with Table No.................................................................................9-17

9.26 Temporary Release of Order Table No. Entry Compulsion ...........................................9-18

9.27 Guest Check Merge .......................................................................................................9-18

9.28 Guest Check Transfer....................................................................................................9-18

9.29 Guest Check Split ..........................................................................................................9-19

9.30 Sale Finalization by Media Keys (Payment of a Sale) ...................................................9-20

9.31 Charge Posting by Check Track ....................................................................................9-20

9.32 Sale Paid in Foreign Currencies ....................................................................................9-21

9.33 Media Transfer...............................................................................................................9-21

9.34 Tax Status Modification .................................................................................................9-22

9.35 Automatic Tax Calculation .............................................................................................9-22

9.36 Manual Tax Entry...........................................................................................................9-22

9.37 Tax Exemption ...............................................................................................................9-23

9.38 Listing Capacity Open....................................................................................................9-23

9.39 Selective Itemizer (SI) Status Modification ....................................................................9-23

9.40 Selective Itemizer (SI) Total Read .................................................................................9-23

9.41 PLU Preset Price Read..................................................................................................9-24

9.42 PLU Stock Read ............................................................................................................9-24

9.43 Dollar Discount ..............................................................................................................9-25

9.44 Percent Discount, Percent Charge ................................................................................9-25

9.45 Non-add Number Print ...................................................................................................9-26

9.46 Number-of-guests Entry.................................................................................................9-26

9.47 Function Key Entry ........................................................................................................9-26

9.48 Tip Paid..........................................................................................................................9-27

9.49 Charge Tip .....................................................................................................................9-27

9.50 Received-on-Account ....................................................................................................9-27

TOC 1

TOC 3

CAUTION:

1. This manual may not be copied in whole or in part without prior written permission of

TOSHIBA TEC.

2. The contents of this manual may be changed without notification.

3. Please refer to your local Authorized Service representative with regard to any queries

you may have in this manual.

9.51 Paid-Out.........................................................................................................................9-28

9.52 Print Mode Invert ...........................................................................................................9-28

9.53 RKP (remote kitchen printer) Receipt Cut .....................................................................9-29

9.54 RKP (remote kitchen printer) Message Print .................................................................9-30

9.55 Guest Check Print..........................................................................................................9-30

9.56 Check Print ....................................................................................................................9-31

9.57 Receipt Post-issue (Receipt Reprint & Guest Check Reprint) .......................................9-32

9.58 Server Transfer ..............................................................................................................9-33

9.59 Employee Clock-in/Clock-out.........................................................................................9-34

10. Troubleshooting ............................................................................................10-1

10.1 Problems concerning the Power Supply........................................................................10-1

10.2 Problems concerning the Keyboard...............................................................................10-1

10.3 Problems concerning the Drawer ..................................................................................10-2

10.4 Problems concerning the Display ..................................................................................10-2

10.5 Problems during Normal Operations .............................................................................10-2

TOC 2

1. TO OUR CUSTOMERS

EO1-11138

1-1

1. INTRODUCTION

Thank you for choosing the TEC electronic cash register FS-2600-1 series. This owner’s manual provides a de-

scription of the functions and handling of this register and should be read carefully to ensure optimum per-

formance. Since every consideration has been given to safety and reliability, there is no danger of damaging the

machine by incorrect operation.

Please refer to this manual whenever you have any questions concerning the machine. This machine has been

manufactured under strict quality control and should give you full satisfaction.

• Be sure to keep this manual for future reference.

1.1 Applicable Model

• FS-2600-1MD-US

• FS-2600-1MD-C-US

The description of the model number is as follows.

F S - 2 6 0 0 - 1 M D - C - U S

Destination (Nation Code)

(US, etc.)

MCR (Magnetic Card Reader)

Blank: Not provided

C: Provided

BIU (Back Indicator Unit for Customer)

Blank: Not provided

D: Provided (1 line)

M/S Board for Master-Satellite System

Blank: Not provided

M: Provided

1.2 Accessories

Owner’s Manual Control Key Double Sems Screw

(EO1-11138; 1 pc.) (REG Key, MGR Key, MA Key, (M-3x8; 1pc.)

S Key; 2 pcs. respectively)

* Used to secure the Cable Blind Plate

Refer to 3.2 Rear View (page 3-2).

2. SPECIFICATION

EO1-11138

2-1

2. SPECIFICATION

2.1 ECR

2.1.1 Software Item

2.1 ECR

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Size 280 mm (width) x 442 mm (depth) x 235.6 mm (height)

(or 475.5 mm (depth) and 129.5 mm (height) when the operator display

is in its full opened position.)

Weight 4.0 kg

Power Required 117 V, 60 Hz (US)/240V, 50 Hz (AU)

Power Consumed 0.3 A (operating; US)/0.14 A (operating; AU)

Ambient Temperature 0 C to 40 C

Relative Humidity 10% to 90% RH (non-condensing)

Interface Port COM 1 & 2, PC and M/S

Memory Protection Long-lasting rechargeable lithium battery is provided.

Capacity of Department Memory Max. 99 departments

Capacity of Group Memory Max. 30 groups

Capacity of Major Group Memory Max. 10 major groups

Capacity of Cashier Memory Max. 8 cashiers for the [CLK] key

Using Standard Memory Using Expansion Memory

Max. 15 cashiers Max. 99 cashiers

Capacity of Employee Memory Max. 200 employees Max. 200 employees

Capacity of Customer File Table Max. 5000 tables Max. 5000 tables

Capacity of PLU Memory Without the option “Collecting the PLU data by each price level”

Max. 1000 PLUs Max. 2500 PLUs

With the option “Collecting the PLU data by each price level”

Max. 500 PLUs Max. 1500 PLUs

Capacity of PLU Group Memory Max. 99 PLU groups

Unit Price Programmable Max. 6 digits; 0.00 to 9999.99

2.2.1 Hardware Item

2. SPECIFICATION

EO1-11138

2-2

2.2 Hardware Option

Option Name Description Source

IF-2600RS The 3rd printer can be connected to the FS-2600 by Contact your TOSHIBA

installing this interface board. TEC representative.

KRAM-H-2600 Expansion memory of 0.5 MB

KRAM-1-2600 Expansion memory of 1 MB

KRAM-2-2600 Expansion memory of 2 MB

KRAM-4-2600 Expansion memory of 4 MB

KBD-2600-2 2- line back indicator unit

(16-digit dot display and 7-digit 7-segment display)

KRD-2600-1 1-line remote indicator unit (7-digit 7- segment display)

KRD-2600-2 2- line remote indicator unit

(16-digit dot display and 7-digit 7-segment display)

IF-1650C Interface board to connect a scale to the FS-2600

MD-6 A maximum of 2 remote drawers can be connected to the

FS-2600 to realize the multi-drawer feature. Either the “multi-

drawer feature controlled by a cashier” or “multi-drawer

feature controlled by a currency” can be selected.

3. APPEARANCE AND NOMENCLATURE

EO1-11138

3-1

AC Cord

3.1 Front View

3. APPEARANCE AND NOMENCLATURE

3.1 Front View

■ Power Switch ............ Insure that the power switch is in the OFF position before connecting AC power.

Operator Display

Keyboard

Power Switch

MCR (Magnetic

Card Reader)

Navigation Key

you can adjust the display

to the best viewing angle.

Brightness Control

CAUTION!

1. Do not try to force the display beyond its full opened position.

2. Do not press on or put any pressure on the MCR unit as it may be easily broken.

3. APPEARANCE AND NOMENCLATURE

EO1-11138

3-2

■ The following printers can be connected to each port (COM 1 to COM 3; COM 4 is for future use).

• BRST-10 (Used for Receipt)

• TM-300 (Used for Receipt, Journal, RKP; Remote Kitchen Printer)

• TM-T88 (Used for Receipt, RKP; Remote Kitchen Printer)

3.2 Rear View

Customer Display

COM 1 Port

Interface for Master-

Satellite System

PC InterfaceCOM 2 Port

IF-2600 RS

(COM 3 & COM 4;

Hardware Option)

■ A maximum of 2 drawers can be connected.

■ A scale can be connected by installing the

IF-1650C (Hardware Option)

Cable Blind Plate

Secure the Cable Blind Plate with the attached

Double Sems Screw.

Refer to 1.2 Accessories (page 1-1).

4. MODE LOCK AND MODE SELECTOR KEYS

EO1-11138

4-1

4. MODE LOCK AND MODE SELECTOR KEYS

4.1 Mode Lock

(POSITION) (FUNCTION)

SET ........... In this position, the register will allow

programming operations.

............... (LOCK position) The register operations are

locked when the Mode Lock is in this position.

Meanwhile, the Display Message and the

current time are displayed.

REG ........... Normal cash register operations are carried

out in this mode. However, the operations

requiring a Manager Intervention cannot be

performed in this mode.

X.............. The sale totals in memory can be read and

the programmed data can be verified in this

position.

MGR........... This position allows to register all normal cash

register operations to be carried out in the

“REG” mode and the operations requiring a

Manager Intervention.

- .............. This is the “Negative Mode”, which

automatically processes all the entries in the

reverse way, i.e. positive items into negative,

and the negative into positive. It is usually

used to return or cancel all the items once

purchased in a sale in the “REG” or “MGR”

mode.

Z.............. All the resettable totals and their respective

counters in memory will be read and reset in

this position.

4.2 Mode Selector Keys

REG Key: The REG Key is used by the cashier or clerk who operates the register.

MGR Key: The MGR Key is used by the store manager or a person authorized by the

manager.

MA Key: The MA Key is used by the store manager who will daily supervise the

collection of money and the printout of transactions recorded by the register.

This key is also used when programming the register.

The keys may be inserted or pulled out at the “LOCK” or “REG” position.

In the OPERATOR’S GUIDE, functions and operations will be described within the range of the Mode Lock

positions of LOCK and REG using the REG key. Since operations requiring other positions and keys are

controlled by the store manager, they are described in the MANAGER’S GUIDE.

4.1 Mode Lock

REG

X

Z

MGR

SET

REG

Key

MGR

Key

MA

Key

REG

MGR

MA

5. DISPLAY

EO1-11138

5-1

Display Item Display Line Description

1 Mode Lock Position 1 Displays the current mode lock position. (7 digits)

SET:

*

SET

*

:

REG:

*

REG

*

X:

*

X/GTX

*

MGR:

*

REG

*

- :

*

REG-

*

Z:

*

Z/GTZ

*

BLIND:

*

SET

*

2 Date 1 Displays the date. (10 digits)

3 Time 1 Displays the time. (5 digits)

4 Cashier Code 1 Displays the cashier code. (2 digits)

5 Cashier Name 1 Displays the cashier name. (12 characters)

6 Terminal Status 2 Displays the indicator which shows the terminal status. For

Indicator details, refer to the next section “Description of each Indicator”.

7 Display Area for each 2 ~ 14 Refer to the display configuration for each mode position.

Mode Position

8 Navigation Key 15 For details, refer to “Description of each Navigation Key” attached

to the display configuration for each mode position.

5.1 Operator Display

5. DISPLAY

The FS-2600 is provided with the LCD operator display and the 7-segment customer display.

5.1 Operator Display

5.1.1 Basic Screen (common to all the mode lock positions)

■ Description of each Display Item

••••*•••• ••••*•••• ••••*•••• ••••*••••

1 1

2 2

3 3

4 4

5 5

6 6

7 7

8 8

9 9

10 10

11 11

12 12

13 13

14 14

15 15

••••*•••• ••••*•••• ••••*•••• ••••*••••

10 20 30 40

1

02-06-1999 03:04 Z9 1CLKendi

6

7

A

B

C

8

9

8

9

8

9

8

9

8

0

2 3 54

5. DISPLAY

EO1-11138

5-2

5.1 Operator Display

■ Description of each Display Item

(continued)

Display Item Display Line Description

9 Printer Error Indicator 15 Displays the error indicator “X” to indicate that an error status has

occurred on the printer which is connected to the terminal. From

the left; Port 1, Port 2 and Port 3. The rightmost one will be used

for the future.

0 Print Data Reception 15 Displays the indicator “★” while the print data is being received

Indicator from another terminal.

A Sales Item Name 11 Displays a sales item which has been just entered with a double-

Guidance Message width sized character. (16 double-width sized characters) Also,

displays an operation guidance message. (Max. 36 characters)

B Quantity 12 Displays a quantity with a double-width sized numeral.

(max. 3-digit integral portion and 2-digit decimal portion)

C Numeric 12 Displays a numeric value entered and a sales total with a double-

Sales Total width sized numeral.

1 For Future Use For Future Use (1 digit)

2 Receipt ON/OFF Indicator Displays OFF while the receipt-issue mode is in “OFF”. (3 digits)

3 RTR (Register-to-Register) Indicator Displays RTR while the RTR declaration is in ON. (3 digits)

4 Price Level Indicator Displays the PLU price level currently selected. (2 digits)

• PRICE 1 (1st PRICE): P1

• PRICE 2 (2nd PRICE): P2

• PRICE 3 (3rd PRICE): P3

• PRICE 4 (4th PRICE): P4

• PRICE 5 (5th PRICE): P5

5 Menu Shift Level Indicator Displays the PLU menu shift level currently selected. (2 digits)

• MENU SHIFT 1: S1

• MENU SHIFT 2: S2

• MENU SHIFT 3: S3

• MENU SHIFT 4: S4

• MENU SHIFT 5: S5

6 Caps Lock and Double-width Displays the following during the programming operation

Designation including the character entries. (2 digits)

Small Letter/Normal Size: a

Capital Letter/Normal Size: A

Small Letter/Double-width Size:

a

Capital Letter/Double-width Size:

A

5.1.2 Description of each Indicator

••••*•••• ••••*•••• ••••*•••• ••••*••••

1 1

2 2

10 20 30 40

1

| || |||||||

78

2

3 456

■Description of each Display Item

Display Item Description

5. DISPLAY

EO1-11138

5-3

5.2 Customer Display

AMOUNT

TL

ST

CG

Upper Row

(16-digit dot

display;

Hardware

Option)

Lower Row

7-digit 7-

segment

display

5.2 Customer Display

Display Item Description

■ Description of each Display Item

(continued)

7 Previous Screen Displays the indicator “↑” when the menu has previous screens.

(1 digit)

8 Continuation Screen Displays the indicator “↓” when the menu has continuation

screens. (1 digit)

6. KEYBOARD

EO1-11138

6-1

6. KEYBOARD

The following is the standard keyboard layout, which was initially set at the factory. This register is designed to be

capable of programming most of the keys at the desired locations or adding keys. For details of the keyboard

layout change, ask your TOSHIBA TEC representative.

6.1 Keyboard Layout

VOID

RECEIPT

ISSUE

R/A PO

PLU Preset-code Keys

BREAK

IN

BREAK

OUT

IN OUT

TX1/M TX2/M TAKE

OUT

EAT

IN

SERVER

TRANS.

CHG

TIP

PAID

POSITION

#

CHECK

MERGE

CHECK

TRANS.

SPLIT

CHECK

PRINT

CHECK

PAGE

UP

ESC ENTER NEXT

ALL

VOID

ITEM

CORR

OPEN PAGE

DOWN

#CNS

START

CHECK

789

X456

PLU 0 00

SERVER

#

123

RECALL

TOTAL

ST

AT/TL

Other Optional Key:

[AMT]

[SCALE]

[TARE]

[SERVER #/RECEIPT]

[CUR 1] to [CUR 5]

[TRAY TL]

[RECEIPT]

[CLK 1] to [CLK 8]

[CARD NO.]

[READ]

[RKP Msg 1] to [RKP Msg 10]

[INVERT]

[MANUAL TARE]

[RKP Msg #]

[FUNCTION 1] to [FUNCTION 20]

[GUEST #]

[MENU 1] to [MENU 5]

[RECEIPT CUT]

[PRICE 1] to [PRICE 5]

[PUB MODE]

[END]

[RECEIPT PRINT]

[PICKUP BAL]

[CODE OPEN]

[DISPLAY]

[CODE SHIFT 1] to

[CODE SHIFT 5]

[RKP]

[TENDER UP]

[COMBO]

[SELECT]

[HOME]

[LCD OFF]

Additional [%-] Keys (%3 to %8)

[RTR] (for Master-Satellite System)

[000] (Triple-zero Key)

[CHECK]

[Chg]

[MISC]

[CPN]

[CREDIT 1] to [CREDIT 5]

[%+] (%1)

[%-] (%2)

[DISC]

[PR OPEN]

[LC OPEN]

[TAX]

[TX3/M], [TX4/M]

[EX]

[SI1/M], [SI1/TL]

[SI2/M], [SI2/TL]

[RPT]

[STOCK]

6. KEYBOARD

EO1-11138

6-2

Server # key.

Used in case of Server/Cashier Code 8-1

Entry Method, to declare start or end of normal operation

by cashier.

Receipt key.

Used to change the receipt-ON/OFF mode. 9-2

Server #/Receipt key.

This is a dual-function key that See pages

has both [SERVER #] and [RECEIPT] functions. for

[SERVER #]

and

[RECEIPT]

Receipt Post-issue key.

Used to issue the receipt of a 9-32

sale when the sale has already been finalized in the

Receipt-OFF mode.

Numeric keys.

Used to enter numeric values. -----

Depressing the [00] key once is the same as depressing

the [0] key twice consecutively. Depressing the [000] key

once is the same as depressing the [0] key three times

consecutively. The [ . ] key is used to designate the

decimal point of a percentage rate or a quantity.

PLU (Price-Look-Up) key.

Used to enter a PLU that is 9-5

linked to a department.

Clear key.

Used to clear numeric entries or a -----

declaration key entry.

Non-add Number Print.

Used to print a non-adding 9-26

number on the receipt and journal for future reference.

No-sale key.

Used to open the cash drawer without 9-2

relating to a sale. 9-4

Amount key.

Used to enter a manual amount of PLU 9-5

item.

Preset Open key.

Used to release a preset-price PLU 9-5

item for a manual price entry.

Listing Capacity Open key.

Used to release the high or 9-23

low amount limit preprogrammed on each PLU.

Preset and Listing Capacity Open key.

This is a dual- See pages

function key that has both [PR OPEN] and [LC OPEN] for

functions. [PR OPEN]

and

[LC OPEN].

Quantity Extension (Multiplication) key.

Used to 9-7

multiply a PLU item entry by a quantity.

Dollar Discount key.

Used to subtract an amount from 9-25

the sale such as a discount during a sale.

Percent Charge key.

Used to add a percent rate to a 9-25

sale.

KEY FUNCTIONS REFERENCE

PAGE

RECEIPT

SERVER #

RECEIPT

ISSUE

PLU

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

00

0

C

#

NS

Percent Discount key.

Used to subtract a percent rate 9-25

from a sale.

Item Correct key.

Used to delete the last item from the 9-14

bill.

Void key.

Used to delete an item entered previously 9-14

(before the last item) in the current transaction.

All Void key.

Used to cancel all the items entered in the 9-15

current sale.

Received-on-Account key.

Used to enter payments 9-3

received on account, i. e. not relating to a sale. Also used 9-27

for change reserve amounts loaned from the store.

Paid-Out key.

Used to record amounts paid out of the 9-28

cash drawer not relating to a sale. Also used for Pick Up

operations, such as money collections for banking

purposes.

Subtotal key.

Used to obtain the subtotal of the current 9-12

transaction.

Cash Amount Tendered/Cash Total key.

Used to 9-20

record all cash paid transactions, and will be able to

finalize a sale operation.

Check key.

This is one of the non-cash media keys, and 9-20

used to cash a check when the register is outside a sale,

or to finalize the transaction as a check payment.

Charge key.

This is another non-cash media key, and 9-20

usually programmed as “Charge Sale Total” key. This key

can also be used for payments in credit cards, if the

[CARD NO.] key is installed.

Media-Coupon key.

This is another non-cash media 9-20

key, and usually programmed as “Coupon Tender” key.

Miscellaneous Media Key.

This is one of additional 9-20

non-cash media keys that may be installed besides

[CHECK] and [Chg]. This key has the same functions

and programmabilities as the [CHECK] key,and usually

used as Tender-only key.

Credit 1 to Credit 5 keys.

These are additional non-cash 9-20

media keys that may be installed besides those already

described, according to the requirements of each store.

Card No. key.

Used to enter the code number (1 to 12) 9-20

which classifies the credit card company followed by the

sale finalization with the [Chg] key.

SI (Selective Itemizer) Total key.

Used to display (and 9-23

print) the selective itemizer contents.

KEY FUNCTIONS REFERENCE

PAGE

VOID

ST

ITEM

CORR

6.2 Functions of Each Key

AMT

PR

OPEN

LC

OPEN

R/A

ALL

VOID

PO

AT/TL

CHECK

6.2 Functions of Each Key

OPEN

X

DISC

% +

Chg

CPN

MISC

CARD

NO.

to

CREDIT

1

CREDIT

5

SERVER

#

% -

SI1/TL SI2/TL

SI/TL

or:

6. KEYBOARD

EO1-11138

6-3

Number-of-Guests Key.

Used to enter the number of 9-26

guests in a party.

Position Table No. Key.

Used to enter a table position # 9-17

of a guest party.

Price Shift Key.

Used to shift the PLU price. 9-10

Pub Mode Key.

Used to temporarily release the Order 9-18

Table No. entry compulsion.

End Key.

Used to end the Modifier Entry and the 9-8

Open Set Menu Entry. 9-9

Guest Check Split Key.

Used to split a guest order table 9-19

account.

Guest Check Merge Key.

Used to merge two order 9-18

tables accounts into one.

Guest Check Transfer Key.

Used to change an order 9-18

table in use into another table at a guest’s request.

Server Transfer Key.

Used to transfer an order table 9-33

account to another server/cashier.

PLU Price-Read Key.

Used to read the preset price of 9-24

the designated PLU from the memory.

Takeout key.

Used to declare a takeout entry. 9-13

Eat-in key.

Used to declare an eat-in entry. 9-13

IN/OUT key.

Used to record a cashier clock-in/-out. 9-34

9-35

Break-in/Break-out Key.

Used to record a cashier 9-34

break-in/-out. 9-35

Manual Tax Key.

Used to enter an irregular tax amount 9-22

that cannot be calculated on the basis of the programmed

tax table.

Scale Key.

Used to enter a scaled item. 9-11

Tare Key.

Used to enter the preset tare weight data 9-12

before a scaled item is entered.

Manual Tare Key.

Used to manually enter the tare 9-12

weight data before a scaled item is entered.

Pickup Balance Key.

Used for the customer check track 9-20

entry.

Customer File Code Open Key.

Used for the customer 9-20

check track entry.

Charge Tip Key.

Used to enter a charge tip amount. 9-27

SI (Selective Itemizer) Modifier key.

Used to reverse 9-23

the SI (Selective Itemizer) status programmed on each

PLU.

Tax Modifier key(s).

Used to reverse the taxable/non- 9-22

taxable status on PLUs, or other tax-status

programmable keys.

Tax Exempt key.

Used to declare the exemption of the 9-23

taxes from the sale.

Repeat key.

Used to repeat a PLU item entry. 9-7

Foreign Currency keys.

Used in tendering or exchange 9-4

with foreign currencies. 9-21

Stock key.

Used to control stock quantity of the PLU with 9-24

the stock-process status. Also used to read the remaining

stock quantity of the designated PLU from the memory.

Cashier 1 to Cashier 8 keys.

Used to declare start or 8-2

end of normal operation by cashier (instead of using

[SERVER #] (or [SERVER #/RECEIPT]) key).

Function 1 to Function 20 keys.

Used to execute a 9-26

command of key string preprogrammed on each of these

keys. An operation series of maximum 10 keys can be

programmed on each key, thus eliminating time in daily

operation routines.

Print Mode Invert Key.

Used to temporarily change from 9-28

the Single/Double Print Mode to the Itemized Print Mode.

RKP Receipt Cut Key.

Used to cut an itemized RKP 9-29

receipt.

RKP Message Print key.

Used to print the respective 9-30

programmed messages on an RKP receipt.

RKP Message Print Key.

Used to print the respective 9-30

programmed messages on an RKP receipt.

Total Key.

Used to finalize the order item entries 9-15

and transfer the total amount to the new balance.

Receipt Print Key.

Used to print the guest check 9-31

contents on the receipt roll paper instead of a slip.

Print Check Key.

Used to issue a presentation. 9-31

Order Table # Key.

Used to enter an Order Table No. of 9-15

a guest party.

Menu Shift Key.

Used to designate the keyboard No. 2-2

for [PLU Preset-code key] located on the keyboard. (MG)

Tray Total Key.

Used to obtain the total of an individual 9-13

guest tray in a guest party.

6.2 Functions of Each Key

KEY FUNCTIONS REFERENCE

PAGE

KEY FUNCTIONS REFERENCE

PAGE

to

SI1/M

SI2/M

SI/M

or:

TX1/M

TX4/M

EX

RPT

to

CUR

1

CUR

5

STOCK

INVERT

to

CLK 1 CLK 8

to

FUNCTION

1

FUNCTION

20

to

MENU

1

MENU

5

TRAY TL

TOTAL

PRINT

CHECK

START

CHECK

RECEIPT

PRINT

RKP

Msg #

RKP

CUT

to

RKP

Msg 1

RKP

Msg 10

READ

TAKEOUT

POSITION

#

to

PRICE

1

PRICE

5

PUB

MODE

END

SPLIT

CHECK

MERGE

CHECK

TRANS.

GUEST

#

SERVER

TRANS.

,

IN OUT

EAT IN

TAX

SCALE

MANUAL

TARE

PICKUP

BAL

CODE

OPEN

CHG

TIP

,

BREAK

IN

BREAK

OUT

6. KEYBOARD

EO1-11138

6-4

Tip Paid Key.

Used to enter a cash tip amount. 9-27

Recall Key.

Used to recall the order table. 9-16

Display Key.

Used to display the menu table. 9-6

PLU Code Shift Key.

Used to shift the PLU code. 9-10

RKP Key.

Used to temporarily change the RKP 2-3

connection. (MG)

Tender Up Key.

This is the speed tender key. 9-20

Combo Key.

Used for the combo entry. 9-11

LCD Off Key.

Used to turn off the LCD display. -----

RTR Key.

Used for the master-satellite system. See M/S

System.

Cursor (Up Arrow) Key

These 10 keys are used -----

Cursor (Down Arrow) Key

for operations through the

Cursor (Left Arrow) Key

LCD.

Cursor (Right Arrow) Key

Escape Key

Enter Key

Next Key

Page Up Key

Page Down Key

Select Key

Each of these keys is programmed with a PLU Code. See pages

That is, depressing one of those keys is equal to entering for [PLU].

a PLU Code then depressing the [PLU] key.

6.2 Functions of Each Key

KEY FUNCTIONS REFERENCE

PAGE

RKP

RECALL

to

CODE

SHIFT 1

CODE

SHIFT 5

DISPLAY

TENDER

UP

COMBO

LCD

OFF

RTR

PLU Preset-

code Keys

↑

↓

←

→

ESC

ENTER

UP

SELECT

PAGE

DOWN

TIP

PAID

7. PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION

EO1-11138

7-1

7. PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION

1. Unpack the accessories and the cash register from the carton.

2. Place the cash register at a proper location, referring to the Safety Precautions at the beginning of the

Operator’s Guide.

3. Remove the tapes and seals for holding parts or protecting the cash registers surfaces.

4. Plug the power cord plug into a wall outlet.

5. Insert the REG key into the Control Lock, then turn it to the REG position.

6. Before starting actual transaction entries on the cash register, ask your manager if you need additional setting

or the initial programmed data needs to be changed. For programming, refer to the following chapters in the

Manager’s Guide:

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATION (page 5-1)

6. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA (page 6-1)

7. PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION

8. CASHIER SIGNING OR CASHIER KEY OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

8-1

8.1.1 Single-drawer Machines

Sign-ON [SERVER #] ................ Cashier code and name are

displayed and the sales transaction

is allowed.

2-digit manager-assign code

(01 to 99)

2-digit cashier’s own secret code

(01 to 99)

Sign-OUT 9 [SERVER #] ............. Message “SIGN OUT” is displayed.

Sign-IN [SERVER #] ................ Cashier code and name are

(same as Sign-ON) displayed and the sales transaction

is allowed.

Sign-OFF 0 [SERVER #] ............. Message “SIGN OFF” is displayed

and no sales transaction is allowed.

8. CASHIER SIGNING OR CASHIER KEY OPERATIONS

The FS-2600 adopts one of the following cashier-identifying operations.

• CODE ENTRY METHOD, using the [SERVER #] key.

• CASHIER KEY METHOD, using [CLK] keys.

8.1 Code Entry Method

Each cashier will sign-ON, sign-OFF, sign-IN, and sign-OUT through the [SERVER #] key.

OPERATION: Mode Lock: REG (or, MGR or - with Manager Intervention)

When you turn the Mode Lock to the REG (or MGR, - ), the following screen will appear on the LCD.

8.1 Code Entry Method

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04

P1S1

Please input cashier code

0.00

TOTAL

0.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

8. CASHIER SIGNING OR CASHIER KEY OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

8-2

8.2 Cashier Key Method ([CLK] Keys)

Sign-ON..........to be operated to start the job.

Sign-OUT........to be operated to leave the register for a while expecting to come back soon.

Sign-IN............to be operated when the cashier comes back from a break declared by Sign-OUT.

Sign-OFF ........to be operated to end the job.

8.1.2 Multi-drawer Machines

Operations are basically the same as those for Single-drawer Machines, except that a one-digit drawer No. is

entered through the [X] key prior to the Sign-ON entry:

Sign-ON [X] [SERVER #]

2-digit manager-assign code

2-digit cashier’s own secret code

1 or 2 as Drawer No.

Entry of a drawer No. opens the designated drawer on finalizing the sale transaction. Designation of the drawer

No. which is being used by another cashier causes an error.

Sign-OUT

Sign-IN Same as those for Single-drawer Machines.

Sign-OFF

NOTE: When the drawer No. entry and the [X] key depression are skipped in the sign-ON, the drawer 1 will be

automatically assigned to the cashier, if the drawer 1 is not being used by another cashier.

8.2 Cashier Key Method ([CLK] Keys)

When the [SERVER #] key is not installed, [CLK] keys ([CLK 1] to [CLK 8]; max. 8 keys) may be provided on

the ECR keyboard.

Sale entries will be possible only when one of the [CLK] keys is depressed (in “REG”, “MGR”, or “ - ” mode).

When the same [CLK] key is again depressed, the cashier is in Cashier OFF status.

NOTE: When a cashier key is set ON, the cashier name will be displayed in the LCD.

8. CASHIER SIGNING OR CASHIER KEY OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

8-3

8.3 Training Mode Start and End

This section describes the training function provided for newly employed cashiers. After entering the training

mode, a cashier may operate the same transaction entries as those in the REG mode. The data in the Training

Mode is processed into the training cashier memory, therefore it will not affect any actual sales data in business.

CONDITION Outside a sale, and in Cashier Signed-OFF condition for CASHIER CODE ENTRY Method

8.3.1 Operation for Training Modes Start

■ Code Entry Method

[SERVER #] ............................................The screen shown below appears on the LCD.

2-digit manager-assign code of a cashier with Training status (01 to 99)

2-digit cashier’s secret code (01 to 99)

■ Cashier Key Method

Set the Cashier Key programmed with Training status.

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

*

TRAINING

*

SIGN ON

*

2CLBROWN

0.00

TOTAL

0.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

8.3.2 Entries in Training Mode

A trainee can operate all the transaction entries described in the next chapter.

except: 1) The drawer will not open.

2) The Consecutive No. on the receipt will not be incremented.

3) Training symbol is printed on the receipt and the guest check.

4) Sales items entered in the Training Mode will not be printed on the journal.

5) If the remote kitchen printer is connected, the sales items entered in the Training Mode will be

printed on it with the training symbol.

8.3.3 Operation for Training Mode End

■ Code Entry Method

0 [SERVER #]

■ Cashier Key Method

Change the current Cashier Key to another.

8. CASHIER SIGNING OR CASHIER KEY OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

8-4

8.4 “Cashier Exclusive” Option

When the program option “Cashier Not exclusive” is selected:

Every Cashier can access the other cashiers’guest order table accounts as well as his/her own.

When the program option “Cashier Exclusive” is selected:

Cashiers with the status “Own Tables only”

The Cashier can only access the guest order tables from which he/she first takes orders or has reserved. An

error results on attempting to access the other cashiers’ tables.

Cashiers with the status “All Tables”

The Cashier can access any order table besides those he/she reserves or takes orders from. In this case, the

same is applied to the cashier as described for the program option “Cashier Not exclusive” selection above.

NOTE: When the program option “Cashier Exclusive” is selected, even a cashier with the status “All Tables”

cannot handle the order table which a cashier with Training status has opened.

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-1

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

WARNING!

When opening the cash drawer, be careful not to let the drawer hit any person.

■ Condition Necessary to Start Transaction Entries

Mode Lock: Insert the “REG” key and set it to the “REG” position.

Cashier Sign-ON: If the [SERVER #] key is used for identifying a cashier, you must sign-ON or sign-IN.

(See Section 8.1)

If Cashier Keys are installed, you must set your cashier key to the ON status.

(See Section 8.2)

■ Description of each Navigation Key (REG, MGR, - )

13 13

14 14

15 15

••••*•••• ••••*•••• ••••*•••• ••••*••••

10 20 30 40

1

2

3

4

5

1) Except the case 2) below

Display Item Description

1 Navigation Key 1 DISP1

2 Navigation Key 2 DISP2

3 Navigation Key 3 DISP3

4 Navigation Key 4 DISP4

5 Navigation Key 5 DISP5

2) While the menu window is displayed

Display Item Description

1 Navigation Key 1 ↓

2 Navigation Key 2 ↑

3 Navigation Key 3 Select

4 Navigation Key 4 Enter

5 Navigation Key 5 Pg dw

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-2

9.1 Receipt-Issue/Non-issue Selection

This operation determines whether or not the receipt is issued.

Mode Lock may be in any position: Pressing the [SERVER #/RECEIPT] key without a prior numeric entry or

pressing the [RECEIPT] key (whichever key is installed on the keyboard) will

change the receipt ON/OFF status. Each time the key is pressed the receipt

ON/OFF status is changed.

1 to 4

(corresponding to Line No.

1 to 4 in programming)

9.2 Store Message Display

This operation designates and displays one of the 4 messages programmed to be displayed in the REG or MGR

mode when the register is outside a sale. The message is displayed on the operator display and the dot display

area in the customer display.

OPERATION (must be operated outside a sale)

|Display Message Code| [NS]

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04

OFF P1S1

Receipt OFF

Indicator

RECEIPT OFF

0.00

TOTAL

0.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

NOTES: 1. The “R OFF” status at the starting of a

transaction entry decides whether a

receipt will be issued for the transaction

or not. Switching the Receipt ON/OFF

status during a transaction will not be

effective.

2. If a transaction entered with the “R OFF”

status and finalized but a receipt is

required, the [RECEIPT ISSUE] (Post-

issue Receipt) key can be operated to

issue a receipt.

NOTE: This operation is effective when the program options “Display Message Method 16 CHARACTERS

HELD” and “Display Message DISPLAY in REG and MGR mode (as well as in LOCK mode)” are both

selected.

9.3 No-sale

The no-sale transaction is used to open the cash drawer without affecting any sales, such as for giving change,

testing the receipt/journal print condition, etc.

OPERATION (must be operated outside a sale)

[NS]...................... The drawer opens and a No-sale receipt is issued.

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-3

9.4 Loan

Max. 3 lines of Commercial Message

RESTAURANT

TEC

1343 PEACH DRIVE

PHONE : 87-6437

Open 10:00am to 9:00pm

Closed: every Wednesday

02-06-1999 SAT

#3001

**

*

NO SALE

**

*

JONES

0085 15:59TM

Thank you

Call again

-- Receipt Print Format --

Max. 4 lines of Store

Name/Message

(REMARK 2 below)

Date (Month-Day-Year order in

this sample)

Day-of-Week

Name of the cashier who is

operating the register.

Register No.

No-sale Receipt Header

Consecutive No.

Current Time

Max. 2 lines of Footer

Logo Message (REMARK 1 below)

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

*

NO SALE

*

NO SALE

0.00

TOTAL

0.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

NOTES: 1. A no-sale transaction after a non-add

number print can be prohibited by the

program option.

2. A no-sale transaction after an Order

Table No. entry is not possible.

REMARKS: 1. When the program option “Footer

Logo Message Print” is selected, a

maximum of 2-line Footer Logo

Message will be additionally printed

on the receipt issued for the sales

transaction without the Order Table

No. entry.

2. If your printer is the BRST-10 or the

TM-T88, you can make and print

your own logo on the Store Name/

Message area.

Repeatable to add up amounts.

. . .

To read the loan

total so far entered.

9.4 Loan

This operation is used to record the cash amounts loaned from the store as the change reserve in the drawer.

OPERATION (must be operated outside a sale)

[R/A] |Cash Amount Loaned| [AT/TL] ([ST]) [AT/TL]

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-4

9.5 Check Cashing (No-sale cashing of a non-cash media)

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

*

START BANK

*

CASH

20.00

CASH

30.00

CASH

50.00

TOTAL

100.00

TOTAL

100.00

TOTAL

100.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

9.5 Check Cashing (No-sale cashing of a non-cash media)

OPERATION (must be operated outside a sale)

|Check Amount to be Cashed| [CHECK] [NS] ........... The drawer opens to enable the exchange.

Max. 8 digits 1 to 99999999

NOTE: A loan transaction after an Order Table No.

entry is not possible.

Max. 8 digits 1 to 99999999

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

CUR1

20.00

0.365

*

CHANGE

7.30

CHANGE

7.30

TOTAL

0.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

NOTES: 1. Other non-cash media keys may be used for this purpose if programmed to allow no-purchase

cashing.

2. A check cashing transaction after an Order Table No. entry is not possible.

9.6 No-sale Exchange from Foreign Currency to Domestic Currency

OPERATION (must be operated outside a sale)

[CUR1] |Amount of Foreign Currency 1 to be exchanged| [NS]

NOTES: 1. The [CUR 2] to [CUR 5] keys operate in

the same way.

2. The fraction process method is fixed to

Round OFF.

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-5

9.7 No-sale Exchange from Domestic Currency to Foreign Currency

OPERATION (must be operated outside a sale)

|Amount of Domestic Currency to be exchanged| [CUR 1] [NS]

NOTES: 1. The [CUR 2] to [CUR 5] keys operate in the same way.

2. A program option allows you to prohibit the No-sale Exchange from domestic currency to foreign

currency.

3. The fraction process method is fixed to Round OFF.

• [PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) |Price| [PLU Preset-Code Key]

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

CATEND

20.00

1.214

*

CUR2

16.47

CUR2

16.47

TOTAL

0.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

9.8 PLU (menu item) Entry through the Keyboard

Each PLU is preprogrammed as the “PRESET” type (with a price preset) or “OPEN” type (with no price preset).

Perform the operation depending on the type selected.

OPERATION

■

Open PLU Type

• |Open-PLU Code| [PLU] |Price| [AMT]

Max. 7 digits

1 to 9999999

• |Price| [PLU Preset-Code Key] of Preset-PLU

Max. 7 digits

1 to 9999999

■

Preset PLU Type

• |Preset-PLU Code| [PLU]

• [PLU Preset-Code Key] of Preset-PLU

■

Preset-price Open Entry through Preset PLU Type

• [PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) |Preset-PLU Code| [PLU] |Price| [AMT]

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

1

PLU000001 1.00T

PLU000001

1.00

1 TOTAL

1.15

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

Max. 7 digits

1 to 9999999

Max. 7 digits

1 to 9999999

T: Taxable

Symbol

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-6

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

PLU000001

PLU000010

PLU000100

0.00

TOTAL

0.00

↓ ↑ Select Enter Pg dw

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

1.00T

PLU000001

PLU000010

PLU000100

P

1.00

1 TOTAL

1.15

↓ ↑ Select Enter Pg dw

■

Through the [PLU] key with the menu table

programmed

[PLU] .............. Displays the corresponding menu

table window as follows.

■

Function Keys while the Menu Window is displayed

[↑] [↓]: Cursor

[SELECT]: PLU (menu item) Selection

|Quantity| [SELECT] ([ENTER]): Quantity Selection

[NEXT]: Screen Skip or Next Screen Request

[ENTER]: PLU (menu item) Selection and Entry

Operation Example 1) You select and enter the following item from the menu window shown above.

PLU 000001 (1 item)

[DISPLAY 1] ([SELECT]) [ENTER]

Operation Example 2) You select and enter the following items from the menu window shown above.

PLU 000010 (1 item), PLU 000100 (3 items)

[DISPLAY 1] [↓] ([SELECT]) [ENTER] [↓] [3] [SELECT] [ENTER]

. . .

Press once.

. . .

Press twice.

9.9 PLU (menu item) Entry through the Menu Window

This register allows you to select and enter a PLU (menu item) through the Menu Window.

OPERATION

■

Through the [DISPLAY] key

[DISPLAY] .........................................................Displays the corresponding menu table window as follows.

([DISPLAY 1] to [DISPLAY 99])

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-7

9.10 Repeat Entry

Max. 7 digits

1 to 9999999

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

1

PLU000004 2.00T

1

PLU000004 2.00T

1

PLU000004 2.00T

PLU000004

3

2.00

3 TOTAL

7.32

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

• |Price| [PLU Preset-Code Key] [Same key] (or [RPT])

■

Preset PLU Type

• |Preset-PLU Code| [PLU] [PLU] (or [RPT])

• [PLU Preset-Code Key] [Same key] (or [RPT])

■

Preset-price Open Repeat

• [PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) |Preset-PLU Code| [PLU] |Price| [AMT] [RPT]

• [PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) |Price| [PLU Preset-Code Key] [RPT]

NOTES: 1. If the first item of those repeated is modified with [SI/M] or [TX/M], the modified status will be

effective through the last item of the repeated.

2. Please note that the Preset-price Open Repeat can only be performed by the [RPT] key.

3. A negative PLU item cannot be repeated.

9.11 Quantity Extension (Multiplication)

OPERATION

■

Open PLU Type

• |Open-PLU Code| [PLU] |Quantity| [X] |Price| [AMT]

• |Quantity| [X] |Price| [PLU Preset-Code Key] of Open-PLU

■

Preset PLU Type

• |Quantity| [X] |Preset-PLU Code| [PLU]

• |Quantity| [X] [PLU Preset-Code Key] of Preset-PLU

Max. 7 digits

1 to 9999999

Max. 7 digits

1 to 9999999

Max. 7 digits

1 to 9999999

NOTES: 1. While the menu window is displayed, operate as follows to cancel a PLU (menu item) already

selected by the [SELECT] key.

[0]

→

[SELECT]

2. While the menu window is displayed, you cannot perform the following sales transactions.

• Subtotal Read

• Void

• Dollar Discount, % Operations

9.10 Repeat Entry

To repeat the same item of the last entry, simply depress the last key of the PLU entry sequence or depress the

[RPT] key.

OPERATION

■

Open PLU Type

• |Open-PLU Code| [PLU] |Price| [AMT] [AMT] (or [RPT])

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-8

9.12 Set Menu Entry

■

Preset-price Open Repeat

• [PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) |Preset-PLU Code| [PLU] |Quantity| [X] |Price| [AMT]

• |Quantity| [X] [PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) |Price| [PLU Preset-Code Key] of Preset-PLU

NOTES: 1. Quantity .................... Max. 3 integral + 3 decimal digits (Use the [ . ] key for entering decimal digits.)

Price (Unit Price) ...... Max. 6 digits

Product ..................... Must not exceed 8 digits.

2. When the Quantity is 1-digit integer (1 to 9) followed by a Code-preset PLU key with a price

preset, the [X] key is omissible.

3. The product obtained by multiplication cannot be repeated.

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

3

PLU000004 6.00T

PLU000004

3

6.00

3 TOTAL

7.32

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

4. The decimal portion of the Quantity

entry itself is processed down to the two

digits below the decimal point. The

fraction rounding in this case is fixed to

ROUND OFF.

5. You can select the rounding process of

the fractions of the product (result of

multiplication) by a program option:

ROUND OFF (initial setting), ROUND

UP, or ROUND DOWN.

0.001 to 999.999

9.12 Set Menu Entry

Up to 50 set menu tables are available. You can select two kinds of the set menu table; Preset Menu Type and

Open Menu Type.

OPERATION

■

Preset Menu Table Type

• One Set Menu Entry

PLU Entry of main menu Sub menu PLUs are automatically entered.

• Quantity Extension

|Quantity| [X] PLU Entry of main menu Sub menu PLUs are automatically multiplied and

entered.

■

Open Menu Table Type

• One Set Menu Entry

PLU Entry of main menu PLU Entries of sub menus [END]

• Quantity Extension

|Quantity| [X] PLU Entry of main menu PLU Entries of sub menus [END]

0.001 to 999.999

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

1

PLU000005 10.00T

1

PLU000050

1

PLU000500

PLU000005

3

10.00

3 TOTAL

10.70

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

NOTES: 1. Repeat Entry is not possible for the set

menu items.

2. Modifier Entry is not possible for the set

menu items.

3. Void Entry is not possible for the set

menu items.

4. As for the Preset Menu Table Type, up

to seven menu items can be

programmed to each table.

Main Menu

Sub Menus

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-9

9.13 Modifier Entry

Entry of PLU Entry of PLU which is [END]

(menu item) which it programmed for

is allowed to enter modifier use

the modifier items

Up to 30 modifier PLUs can be entered.

If no modifier item is required.

NOTES: 1. The [END] key depression is omissible

in the following cases and the modifier

entry is automatically finalized.

• Ordinary PLU item is entered after

a modifier PLU.

• The [TOTAL] key is operated after a

modifier PLU.

• Sale finalization by the media keys is

performed after a modifier PLU.

2. Quantity Extension is available for a

modifier PLU. Multiplied sales item

count is displayed for a modifier PLU.

When a modifier PLU with preset price

programmed is multiplied by the

Quantity Extension, the preset price will

also be multiplied.

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

RARE

0.00

TOTAL

0.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

5. As for the Open Menu Table Type, if the quantity of sub menu items to be entered is

programmed, the set menu entry is completed when the quantity of sub menu items reaches the

programmed quantity. In this case, depressing the [END] key is unnecessary.

6. As for the Open Menu Table Type, Quantity Extension is available for a sub menu PLU. Even

when a main menu PLU is multiplied by the Quantity Extension, sub menu PLUs will not be

multiplied.

9.13 Modifier Entry

You can select and enter “MODIFIER” PLUs (such as “PEPPER”, “RARE”, “MEDIUM” for grilling a steak item,

and toppings for dishes, etc.).

OPERATION

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

1

BEEF STEAK 15.00

1

RARE

1

PEPPER

BEEF STEAK

3

15.00

3 TOTAL

15.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

9.14 Other Income PLU Entry

This operation is used to enter items which do not directly become sales for the restaurant, such as postage, gift

wrapping fee, utility (payment of electricity and gas), and donation.

OPERATION

The same key operation as “PLU (menu item) Entry”. However, use the PLU which has been linked to the

Other Income Department.

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-10

9.15 PLU Code Shift Entry

Depressing the [CODE SHIFT] key designates and enters a PLU item, adding the printed number (1 to 4) to an

entered PLU code.

OPERATION

[CODE SHIFT 1] PLU Entry ............................ (To enter a PLU item of the entered code plus 1)

[CODE SHIFT 2] PLU Entry ............................ (To enter a PLU item of the entered code plus 2)

[CODE SHIFT 3] PLU Entry ............................ (To enter a PLU item of the entered code plus 3)

[CODE SHIFT 4] PLU Entry ............................ (To enter a PLU item of the entered code plus 4)

Example) When the PLU code 7 is designated after the [CODE SHIFT 2] is depressed, this sales transaction

will result in the sales item entry of the PLU code 9.

NOTES: 1. Depressing the [C] key immediately

after the [CODE SHIFT] key results in

the cancellation of the PLU Code Shift

Entry.

2. You can depress the [CODE SHIFT]

key any number of times before the PLU

Entry. The last depressed [CODE

SHIFT] key becomes effective.

3. Function of the [CODE SHIFT] key is

effective for the next PLU Entry only.

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

CODE SHIFT2

0.00

TOTAL

0.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

with the 1st price

. . .

Price shift declaration

. . .

with shifted price

9.16 PLU Price Shift Entry

Up to five different unit prices can be programmed for each PLU and you can select either of the following two

features.

9.16.1 Price Shift Entry “Effective only for One PLU Entry” Feature

OPERATION

(PLU entries) [PRICE 2] PLU entry .......................After the PLU Entry, the price

to mode automatically returns to

[PRICE 5] the 1st price mode.

9.16.2 Price Shift Entry “Keeping the shifted Price Level” Feature

You can shift the PLU price level to another in the following three cases.

• Using the [PRICE] key

The same key operation as “Effective only for One PLU Entry” Feature. However, the shifted price level is held

until another [PRICE] key is depressed.

• Using the Hourly Range Designation

Hourly range to start shifting each price level can be programmed. If programmed, the price level will be

automatically shifted to another when the hourly range starts.

• Using the Price Level for each Customer

Price level can be programmed to each customer. PLU entry will be performed on the basis of the

programmed information. For details, refer to the section 9.31 Charge Posting by Check Track on page 9-20.

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-11

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

PRICE SHIFT3

0.00

TOTAL

0.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

9.17 Combo (Combination) Sale Entry

NOTE: A program option allows you to prohibit

operating the [PRICE] key in the REG mode.

9.17 Combo (Combination) Sale Entry

This operation is used to perform the special discount (%-, Dollar Discount, Free of Charge) to the PLU Entry on

the basis of the Combo Table information. You can select either of the following two features.

■

Manual Combo Sale Entry Feature

Combo sale entry becomes effective and is performed only when you depress the [COMBO] key before the sale

finalization.

■

Automatic Combo Sale Entry Feature

Combo sale entry is automatically performed when the sale transaction is finalized. To temporarily prohibit the

combo sale entry, the use of the [COMBO] key is effective.

OPERATION

Depress the [COMBO] key any time before ...........When the combo sale entry is effective, the descriptor

the sale finalization. “COMBO” is displayed on the operator display. When not

effective, the descriptor disappears. The descriptor “DISC” is

displayed when the special discount is performed.

NOTE: In the combo sale entry, the 1st preset price

programmed for each PLU is used. Also in this

entry, only the preset-price PLUs can be used.

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

COMBO DISC P1S1

1

PLU000001 1.00T

1

PLU000008 9.50T

SUBTL 10.50

COMBO DISC -4.75

SUBTL 5.75

TAX 0.82

CASH

6.57

CASH

6.57

2 TOTAL

6.57

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

9.18 Scale Entry

OPERATION (Scale entry is allowed only for the scale type PLUs)

9.18.1 Automatic Scale Entry (without tare or by the tare automatic subtraction)

• Through Preset-PLU: Place the item on the scale platter. ([SCALE])

(M)

|Preset PLU Code| [PLU]

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-12

9.19 Subtotal Read

9.18.5 Scale Entry for the Void Item

[VOID] to be continued to the top of the “Manual Scale Entry” sequence above.

per Unit Weight

NOTE: When the PLU is programmed with a Tare Table No., the tare weight is automatically subtracted from

the scaled weight, and thus only the net weight is processed.

9.18.2 Scale Entry by entering the Tare Table No.

|Tare Table No.| [TARE] to be continued to the arrows marked with “(M)” in the above two

operations of the Automatic Scale Entry.

9.18.3 Scale Entry by manually entering the Tare Weight

|Tare Weight| [MANUAL TARE] to be continued to the arrows marked with “(M)” in the above two

operations of the Automatic Scale Entry.

1 to 9

Any value other than 0,

however, less than the

weight of scaled item

9.18.4 Manual Scale Entry

|Net Weight| of the item [SCALE] to be continued to the arrows marked with “(M)” in the

above two operations of the Automatic Scale Entry.

1 to 99999

(unit: g or 1/100 LB. for example, enter 5 for 0.05LB.)

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

SCALE

0.999

TOTAL

0.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

• Through Open-PLU: Place the item on the scale platter. ([SCALE])

(M)

|Open-PLU Code| [PLU] |Unit Price| [AMT]

9.19 Subtotal Read

You can select one of the following three types of subtotal.

9.19.1 Tax included Subtotal

Depress the [ST] key any time during the sales transaction. The sales subtotal including tax will be displayed.

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-13

9.20 Tray Total Read

9.19.2 Net Subtotal (tax not included)

Depress the [ST] key any time during the sales transaction. The net sales subtotal (excluding tax) will be

displayed.

9.19.3 Eat-in/Takeout Subtotal

Depress the [EAT IN] or the [TAKEOUT] key before the sale transaction is finalized. The register calculates and

displays the subtotal according to the programmed Eat-in/Takeout tax status.

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

1

PLU000015 25.00T

SUBTL 25.00

CASH

25.00

*

TAKE OUT

*

CASH

25.00

1 TOTAL

25.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

1

PLU000001 1.00T

SUBTL

1.10

1 TOTAL

1.10

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

1

PLU000001 1.00T

1

PLU000010 1.50

TAX 0.25

TRAY TL

2.75

TRAY TL

2.75

2 TOTAL

2.75

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

9.20 Tray Total Read

Depress the [TRAY TOTAL] key after entering PLU items. The contents of the tray total itemizer which include

tax is displayed.

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-14

9.21 Item Correct

If you make an incorrect entry in the following sales transactions, depress the [ITEM CORR] key to delete the last

entered item.

OPERATION

PLU ENTRY

REPEAT ENTRY

QUANTITY EXTENSION

DOLLAR DISCOUNT [ITEM CORR]

PERCENT CHARGE/DISCOUNT

RECEIVED-ON-ACCOUNT

PAID-OUT

NOTES: 1. When [ITEM CORR] is depressed after the Repeat Entry, only the last item of those repeated will

be deleted.

2. When [ITEM CORR] is depressed after the Quantity Extension entry, the entire product (result of

multiplication) will be deleted.

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

1

PLU000007 12.00T

CORR

1

12.00

1 TOTAL

14.04

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

9.22 Void (Designated Line Voiding and Returned Merchandise)

This operation deletes a PLU item (not necessarily the last entered item) already entered in the sales transaction.

It is also used outside a sale to return an item already purchased.

OPERATION

■

Void through the [PLU] key

Depress the [VOID] key prior to or any time during the entry sequence of the following operations:

PLU Entries (except Repeat Entry)

Percent Discount/Charge on a PLU item

■

Void through the Operator Display

Depress the [VOID] key at any point.

[↑] (|Quantity|) [ENTER]

[↓]

[PAGE UP]

[PAGE DOWN]

. . .

Select the item

to be deleted.

. . .

To delete the items by

the Quantity Extension

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-15

9.23 All Void

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

1

PLU000007 12.00T

1

PLU000008 9.50T

*

VOID

*

1

PLU000007 -12.00T

PLU000007

-12.00

1 TOTAL

10.17

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

9.23 All Void

When the current sales transaction now being entered must be canceled before the sale finalization, the All Void

operation is effective.

OPERATION

[ITEM CORR] to execute ALL VOID

Sale Item Entries [ALL VOID]

[C] to cancel ALL VOID

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

1

PLU000001 1.00T

1

PLU000010 1.50T

1

PLU000100 2.00T

1

PLU000002 3.00T

1

PLU000020 3.50T

SUBTL

11.00

*

ALL VD

*

ALL VD

0.00

TOTAL

0.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

NOTE: You cannot perform the All Void if the sales

items of 31 or more have already been entered

in the sales transaction.

1 to 999.9

9.24 Order Entry Control

You can select either of the following two features.

9.24.1 Order Entry Control (Order Table No. Manual Entry)

OPERATION

■

To start new order table:

|Order Table No.| [START CHECK] [TOTAL] ...................................only to reserve order table

See (1)

PLU (menu items) entries [TOTAL] ...................................to enter order items, with

balance forward

See (2)

Sale finalization by....................to enter order items, with

the media keys payment of the check

See (3)

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-16

9.24 Order Entry Control

. . .

Order Table No. is

automatically created.

. . .

Omissible; NOTE 2 below

NOTES: 1. You cannot perform the following sales transactions after entering the order table No.

• No-sale, Received-on-Account, Paid Out

• Negative PLU Entry

• All Void

• Tray Total Read

• Percent Charge/Discount and Dollar Discount on PLU item

2. Entry of the order table No. before depressing the [RECALL] key is omissible. In this case, the

oldest-recorded order table No. among all of the opened order tables will be read out.

■

To cancel the order table already reserved:

|Order Table No. in reservation| [START CHECK] [AT/TL] See (4)

■

To enter order items for the reserved order table, or to enter additional order items for the order table in use:

|Order Table No. in reservation or in use| [START CHECK] PLU (menu items) entries

See (5)

9.24.2 Order Entry Control (Order Table No. Automatic Entry)

OPERATION

■

To start new order table:

[START CHECK] PLU (menu items) entries [TOTAL]............... to enter order items,

with balance forward

See (2)

Sale finalization.... to enter order items,

by the media with payment of the

keys check

See (3)

■

To enter additional order items for the order table No. in use:

(|Order Table No. in use|) [RECALL] PLU (menu items) entries See (5)

(1) (2)

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

TABLE NO

001

P1S1

RESERVATION001

0.00

TOTAL

0.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

TABLE NO

001

P1S1

1

PLU000001 1.00T

1

PLU000010 10.00T

NEW BALANCE001

11.90

2 TOTAL

11.90

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-17

9.25 Order Entry Control with Table No.

(3) (4)

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

TABLE NO

001

P1S1

1

PLU000001 1.00T

1

PLU000010 10.00T

SUBTL 11.00

TAX 0.90

CASH

11.90

CASH

11.90

2 TOTAL

11.90

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

TABLE NO

001

P1S1

CANCEL 001

0.00

0 TOTAL

0.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

(5)

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

TABLE NO

001

P1S1

1

PLU000001 1.00T

1

PLU000010 10.00T

SUBTL

11.90

2 TOTAL

11.90

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

|Table No.| [POSITION #]

(|Order Table No.| [START CHECK]) PLU (menu items) entries Sale finalization by the

media keys

1 to 999.9

Enter the Table No. and depress the

[POSITION #] at either point.

9.25 Order Entry Control with Table No.

OPERATION

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

2’ nd NO.

005

P1S1

1

PLU000010 10.00T

SUBTL 10.00

TAX 0.80

CASH

10.80

CASH

10.80

1 TOTAL

10.80

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

1 to 999.9

. . .

Omissible if unnecessary

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-18

9.26 Temporary Release of Order Table No. Entry Compulsion

This operation releases one sales transaction from the compulsory status of the order table No. entry. It is

effective only when the program option “Compulsion of the Order Table No. Entry” has been programmed.

OPERATION (must be operated outside a sale)

[PUB MODE] PLU (menu items) Entries

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

Non TAB

0.00

TOTAL

0.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

NOTE: After finalizing the sale, the status of the Order

Table No. entry compulsion is automatically

resumed.

9.27 Guest Check Merge

Two different guest check accounts can be merged together.

OPERATION

|Order Table No.| [CHECK MERGE] |Order Table No.| [CHECK MERGE]

[C] to cancel

. . .

Enter the order table No. of which

account is transferred to another.

Enter the order table

No. of the destination.

. . .

NOTES: 1. This operation is available only to the

opened order table account. Entry of

unopened or reserved order table No.

causes an error.

2. If the item buffers of the two order tables

to be merged exceed 100, this operation

will result in an error.

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

TABLE NO

002

P1S1

MERGE 1

INTO 2

NEW BALANCE002

22.52

4 TOTAL

22.52

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

. . .

Old Order Table No.

New Order Table No.

9.28 Guest Check Transfer

Guest check account can be transferred to another of the order table not in use.

OPERATION

|Order Table No.| [CHECK TRANS.] |Order Table No.| [CHECK TRANS.]

[C] to cancel

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-19

9.29 Guest Check Split

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

TABLE NO

002

P1S1

TRANSFER 1

INTO 2

TABLE TRANS002

43.20

4 TOTAL

43.20

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

NOTES: 1. As for the old order table, you can use

reserved or opened one. As for the new

order table, you can use reserved or

unopened one.

2. When the register adopts the feature

“Order Entry Control by automatic entry

of the Order Table No.”, you cannot

enter the new order table No. and it will

be automatically designated.

. . .

9.29 Guest Check Split

Guest check account can be partially transferred to another of the order table not in use.

OPERATION

|Order Table No.| [SPLIT CHECK] |Order Table No.| [SPLIT CHECK] PLU (menu item)

Entries (NOTE 1

below)

[C] to cancel

[TOTAL]

NOTES: 1. You can only enter the sales items which have been stored in the item buffer of the order table of

which account is transferred.

2. When the register adopts the feature “Order Entry Control by automatic entry of the Order Table

No.”, you cannot enter the order table No. of the destination and it will be automatically

designated.

3. After the PLU entries, you can check the contents of the two order tables using the [

←

] and [

→

]

keys.

If a guest wants to pay the check partially or entirely.....

|Order Table No.| [SPLIT CHECK] PLU (menu item) Entries [→] Sale finalization by the

media keys

Enter the order table No. of

which account is partially

transferred to another.

Enter the order table

No. of the destination.

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

TABLE NO

001

P1S1

SPLIT 1

2

4

PLU000010 40.00T

NEW BALANCE002

43.20

4 TOTAL

43.20

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

. . .

Enter the order table

No. of which account is

partially or entirely paid.

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-20

9.30 Sale Finalization by Media Keys (Payment of a Sale)

OPERATION

Paid in One Media:

[Media]

|Amount Tendered| [Media]

Paid by Credit Card:

|Code for Credit Card Company| [CARD No.]

• |Order Table No.| [START CHECK] (|Amount Tendered|) [Chg]

• |Order Table No.| [RECALL]

Multi-tender (Short-tender repeated by the same media):

• PLU (menu item) Entries |1st Amount Tendered| [Media]

|2nd Amount Tendered| [Same Media]

(|Last Amount Tendered|) [Same Media]

Split-tender (Short-tender repeated by different medias):

|Check Amount Tendered Portion| [CHECK]

|Media-Coupon Amount Tendered Portion| [CPN]

(|Cash Amount Tendered Portion|) [AT/TL]

9.30 Sale Finalization by Media Keys (Payment of a Sale)

Totalling (no change calculation)

- - -

Tendering (with change calculation)

1 to 12

- - -

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

1

PLU000010 7.00T

SUBTL 7.00

TOTAL

7.00

CATEND

10.00

CHANGE

3.00

CHANGE

3.00

1 TOTAL

7.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

NOTE: If the [TENDER UP] key is installed on the

keyboard, the cash tendering operation

corresponding to the sales total will be

automatically performed by depressing its key.

Example) The following value is

programmed to the Tender Up

table:

$5.00, $10.00 and $20.00

When you depress the [TENDER UP] key for

the sale total $7.00, the cash tendering

operation by $10.00 will be automatically

performed.

9.31 Charge Posting by Check Track

This operation is used for the charge posting, and the entry of customer code reads out the customer account

balance.

OPERATION

|Customer Code| [PICKUP BAL] PLU (menu item) Entries [CREDIT 5]

Code already opened

|New Customer Code| [CODE OPEN]

Max. 12 digits Code not yet opened

Customer Card reading through the MCR

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-21

9.32 Sale Paid in Foreign Currencies

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

No999999999999

SMITH 100.00

SMITH

100.00

TOTAL

100.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

NOTE: If the PLU price level is programmed to each

customer, the PLU (menu item) entry will be

fixedly performed by the corresponding price

level. In this case, using the [PRICE] key to

change the level causes an error, and also the

hourly range price level is ignored if

programmed.

9.32 Sale Paid in Foreign Currencies

OPERATION

[ST] [CUR1] Amount Tendered in [CUR1] [AT/TL]

Foreign Currency |

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

SUBTL 20.00

TAX 1.60

TOTAL

21.60

CUR1

100.00

0.365

*

CATEND

36.50

CHANGE

14.90

CHANGE

14.90

2 TOTAL

21.60

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

NOTES: 1. The [CUR 2] to [CUR 5] keys operate

the same as [CUR 1], except that each

of these keys has its own exchange rate

programmed corresponding to each

foreign currency.

2. Multi-tendering with the same foreign

currency or Split-tendering with other

medias or foreign currencies are

possible.

3. The foreign currency keys cannot be

used to finalize Received-on-Account

payments, or Paid-out items.

Enter the amount

of the media to be

transferred.

. . .

Depress the media

key of the destination.

4. When a tendering by a foreign currency occurs after a short-tendered condition, the [ST] key will

not be mandatory.

5. A sale of zero or negative balance cannot be finalized using any of the foreign currency keys.

9.33 Media Transfer

This operation is used to change a media already paid and finalized into a different one.

OPERATION (must be operated outside a sale)

|Amount| [Source Media] [Destination Media]

[C]

. . .

Mandatory for

a sale paid in

foreign

currencies.

Displays the

equivalent value

in Foreign

Currency 1.

Display the entered

foreign currency

amount.

Displays the

domestic

currency value

equivalent to the

tendered foreign

currency.

Other media keys may

be used if paid in that

media. (The media

key must be

programmed to allow

tendering in this case.)

Customer

Code

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-22

9.34 Tax Status Modification

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

*

CHANGE

*

CHANGE

CPN

INTO

CASH

10.00

CASH

10.00

TOTAL

0.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

9.34 Tax Status Modification

Tax status of the PLU or required key is reversed:

OPERATION

Depress the [TX1/M] to [TX4/M] of which tax status is to be modified prior to or any time (before the final key

at the latest) during the entry sequence of the following operations. More than one modifier key can be

depressed for the same item entry:

PLU Entries

Percent Discount/Charge

Dollar Discount

NOTE: If the inclusive-tax feature is selected to the [TX3/M] and [TX4/M] keys, the tax status modification

using those keys is not allowed.

9.35 Automatic Tax Calculation

When the tax table (or tax rate) and the tax status of each PLU have been programmed for the register, the tax

calculation is automatically performed on any taxable PLU item.

9.36 Manual Tax Entry

The register allows you to manually enter the tax after the PLU entries.

OPERATION

|Irregular Tax Amount to be Added| [TAX]

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

1

PLU000001 1.00T

TAX5 0.12

TAX5

0.12

1 TOTAL

1.12

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-23

9.37 Tax Exemption

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

1

PLU000010 10.00T

TAX2EX 10.00

TOTAL

10.00

1 TOTAL

10.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

9.37 Tax Exemption

OPERATION

■

Selective Tax Exemption

Examples) [TX1/M] [EX] Sale Finalization ........to exempt Tax 1 from the sale

[TX1/M] [TX2/M] [EX] Sale Finalization ........to exempt Tax 1 & Tax 2 from

the sale

[TX1/M] [TX2/M] [TX3/M] [EX] Sale Finalization ........to exempt Tax 1, Tax 2 and Tax

3 from the sale

■

All Tax Exemption

[EX] Sale Finalization to exempt all the

[TX1/M] [TX2/M] [TX3/M] [TX4/M] [EX] Sale Finalization taxes from the sale

NOTE: If the inclusive-tax feature is selected to the

[TX3/M] and [TX4/M] keys, the tax exemption

of Tax 3 and Tax 4 is not allowed.

9.38 Listing Capacity Open

■

For Departments and PLUs

Depress the [LC OPEN] (or [OPEN]) key prior to or any time during the PLU entry (including REPEAT and

QUANTITY EXTENSION entries). Please note that the [LC OPEN] or [OPEN] key must be pressed, at the latest,

before the final key of the entry sequence. The High Amount Limit for the PLU will be extended with two higher

digits, and the Low Amount Limit will be extended with one lower digit. For entering an amount still exceeding

these limits, you must call for Manager Intervention.

■

For Media Tender Amounts

Depress the [LC OPEN] (or [OPEN]) key before or after the tender amount entry. The High Amount Limit for the

media tendering will be extended with one higher digit. For entering an amount still exceeding this limit, you must

call for Manager Intervention.

9.39 Selective Itemizer (SI) Status Modification

Depress the [SI/M] ([SI1/M], [SI2/M]) key for entering the required PLU item, the same way as [LC OPEN] is

operated. The SI-net status is reversed to non-net status, and vice versa.

9.40 Selective Itemizer (SI) Total Read

Depressing the [SI/TL] key during the sales transaction displays the selective itemizer total calculated.

OPERATION

PLU (menu item) Entry [SI/TL]

([SI1/TL], [SI/2/TL])

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-24

9.42 PLU Stock Read

You can check the current stock of each PLU.

OPERATION (Any time inside or outside a sale, but prohibited during a short-tendered condition.)

■ [STOCK] |PLU Code| [PLU]

■ [STOCK] ([MENU]) [PLU Preset-Code Key]

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

1

PLU000030 7.50TS

SI1 TL

-0.75

SI1 TL

-0.75

1 TOTAL

8.10

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

9.41 PLU Preset Price Read

NOTE: Selective Itemizer Total Read after the order

table No. entry is possible.

. . .

for the shift of price level

9.41 PLU Preset Price Read

You can check the preset price of each PLU.

OPERATION (Any time inside or outside a sale, but prohibited during a short-tendered condition.)

■ [READ] ([PRICE]) |PLU Code| [PLU]

■ [READ] ([PRICE]) [PLU Preset-Code Key]

. . .

for the shift of

price level

([MENU])

. . .

for the shift of keyboard phase

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

READ PLU000030

7.50

TOTAL

0.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

. . .

for the shift of keyboard phase

S: SI-net

Symbol

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

STOCK PLU000030

120.

TOTAL

0.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-25

9.43 Dollar Discount

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

1

PLU000010 10.00T

DISC -0.10

DISC

-0.10

1 TOTAL

10.70

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

NOTES: 1. Discount from the sale total

• An amount exceeding the sale total

cannot be entered without the “Credit

Balance” option. However, the

amount exceeding the sale total

cannot be entered even with the

“Credit Balance” option when the

sales transaction includes the order

table No. entry.

• After the Dollar Discount entry,

additional item entry cannot be

performed.

• Dollar Discount can be performed

only once in a sale.

9.43 Dollar Discount

OPERATION

PLU item entry

(for discount from an individual item)

|Amount| [DISC]

[ST]

(for discount from the sale total)

Max. 7 digits

1 to 9999999

2. Discount from an individual item

• Dollar Discount can be performed only when the sales transaction does not include the order

table No. entry.

9.44 Percent Discount, Percent Charge

OPERATION

PLU entry [%-] (or [%+]) (% operation by the preset rate)

[ST] |Rate| [%-] (or [%+]) (% operation by the manual rate)

0.001 to 99.999

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

1

PLU000010 10.00T

%- 5% -0.50

%-

-0.50

1 TOTAL

10.30

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

NOTES: 1. You can perform the manual rate %

operation by manually entering a % rate

even when the preset rate has been

programmed on the [%] key.

2. % operation for the sale total

• After the % operation, additional item

entry cannot be performed.

• % operation can be performed only

once in a sale.

3. % operation for an individual item

• % operation can be performed only

when the sales transaction does not

include the order table No. entry.

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-26

9.45 Non-add Number Print

Non-add numbers can be entered for future reference, to indicate guest code, media checks, credit cards, etc.

The entered numbers do not affect any sale total data.

OPERATION (allowed any time during a sale or transaction)

|Number| [#]

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

#123000

#

1230.00

TOTAL

0.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

NOTES: 1. A program option allows you to prohibit

operating the No-sale transaction after

entering a non-add number.

2. Non-add number print immediately after

entering the order table No. is not

possible.

9.46 Number-of-guests Entry

Number of the guests of sale can be entered.

OPERATION (allowed any time during a sale or transaction)

|Number of Guests| [GUEST #]

Max. 3 digits

NOTE: When you enter the number of the guests

more than once, the last entered number will

be effective.

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

1

PLU000010 10.00T

GUEST 2CU

GUEST

0.02

1 TOTAL

10.80

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

Max. 18 digits

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

1

PLU000001 1.00T

1

PLU000020 8.50T

SUBTL 9.50

%- 5% -0.48

SUBTL

10.65

2 TOTAL

10.65

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

. . .

[FUNCTION 1] to [FUNCTION 20]

Example) Key operation sequence shown below has

been previously programmed on the

[FUNCTION 1] key:

[1] [PLU] [2] [0] [PLU] [ST] [5] [%-]

9.47 Function Key Entry

Once you depress the [FUNCTION] key, the programmed key operation sequence is automatically performed.

OPERATION

[FUNCTION]

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-27

9.48 Tip Paid

When a guest pays the tip by credit card, this operation can divide the tip and pay it to each cashier in cash.

OPERATION (must be operated outside a sale)

|Cashier Code| [TIP PAID] |Tip Amount| [AT/TL]

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

2CL

2

P1S1

TIP PAID

CASH

10.00

CASH

10.00

TOTAL

0.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

Max. 7 digits

9.49 Charge Tip

OPERATION

(|Order Table No.| [START CHECK]) PLU (menu item) Entry

|Tip Amount| [CHARGE TIP] Payment Entry using the media as the tip.

Max. 7 digits

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

1

PLU000010 10.00T

CHG TIP 0.50

CHG TIP

0.50

1 TOTAL

11.30

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

NOTE: You cannot use the [AT/TL] key for the first

tender operation after depressing the

[CHARGE TIP] key.

(if paid in cash)

(if paid in check)

9.50 Received-on-Account

A received-on-account transaction is used to identify money which is in the drawer but not from the daily

business.

OPERATION (must be operated outside a sale)

|Amount of Payment| [R/A] ([ST]) |Cash Amount Tendered| [AT/TL]

(|Quantity| [X])

|Check Amount Tendered| [CHECK]

[Chg] (if processed into general charge account)

Other Media Finalization

Max. 7 digits

Repeatable if multiple amounts are received.

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-28

Max. 7 digits

9.51 Paid-Out

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

R/A

5.00

R/A

10.00

SUBTL 15.00

CASH

15.00

CASH

15.00

TOTAL

15.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

NOTES: 1. The media keys used for this operation

must be programmed to allow received-

on-account entries.

2. A received-on-account transaction after

an order table No. entry is not possible.

9.51 Paid-Out

A paid-out transaction is used when money is removed from the drawer without totaling to a sale.

OPERATION (must be operated outside a sale)

|Amount to be paid out| [PO] ([ST]) [AT/TL]

Repeatable if multiple amounts are paid out.

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

PO

10.00

SUBTL 10.00

TOTAL

10.00

TOTAL

10.00

TOTAL

10.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

NOTES: 1. Only the [AT/TL] key can finalize a paid-

out transaction (i.e. must be paid out in

cash).

2. A paid-out transaction after an order

table No. entry is not possible.

9.52 Print Mode Invert

When the option “Single/Double Print” is selected for the RKP (remote kitchen printer) receipt, the [INVERT] key

operation can temporarily change the print mode to “Itemized Print”.

OPERATION

Pattern 1: To enter all the PLU items in the itemized mode

[INVERT] PLU entries [TOTAL] (only when the sales transaction has been started

with an order table No. entry) or Sale finalization by the media

keys

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-29

9.53 RKP (remote kitchen printer) Receipt Cut

(PLU entries) [TOTAL] (only when the sales transaction has

been started with an order table No. entry) or

Sale finalization by the media keys

Issues an Itemized receipt for all the items entered here.

. . .

Issues a Single/

Double receipt for

each item entry.

. . .

Issues a Single/

Double receipt for

each item entry.

NOTES: 1. When the option “Itemized Print” is

selected, the Print Mode Invert

operation is not possible.

2. The Itemized Print Mode once declared

by the [INVERT] key is automatically

cancelled by a finalizing operation (by

[TOTAL] or media keys).

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

0.00

INV TOTAL

0.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

Pattern 2: To enter only the designated PLU items in the itemized mode

PLU entries [INVERT] PLU entries [INVERT]

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

1

PLU000001 1.00T

RKP CUT

0.00

1 TOTAL

1.10

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

. . .

Necessary for the

“Single/Double

Print” option

. . .

PLU data is stored

in the RKP printer

buffer.

9.53 RKP (remote kitchen printer) Receipt Cut

This operation issues an RKP (remote kitchen printer) receipt while the print mode is in the “itemized print”.

OPERATION

([INVERT] ) PLU entries [RKP CUT] ...................................... An RKP receipt is issued.

Invert

Indicator

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-30

11-23-1999 TUE

#0

20 RKP MESSAGES ARE

PROGRAMMABLE!

1CL

0209 16:30TM

9.54 RKP (remote kitchen printer) Message Print

This operation prints a message on the RKP.

OPERATION RKP Print

■ [RKP Msg]

([RKP Msg 1] to [RKP Msg 10])

■ |Message No.| [RKP Msg #]

1 to 20

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

20 RKP MESSAGES ARE

PROGRAMMABLE!

RKP Msg

0.00

TOTAL

0.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

NOTES: 1. A message programmed in the RKP

Message Table is printed on the RKP.

No print occurs on receipt.

2. A message output to the RKP consists

of double-sized characters.

9.55 Guest Check Print

A guest check print is required when a sales transaction with an order table No. entry has been finalized by the

media keys (for payment).

OPERATION

Case 1: When the option “Guest check is printed on the receipt roll paper” has been selected:

When a sales transaction is finalized by the media keys (for payment), a guest check will be

automatically issued from the receipt.

This operation is possible during a sales transaction.

ex.) PLU Entry [RKP Msg] PLU Entry

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-31

9.56 Check Print

TABLE NO

1

11-24-1999 WED #0

1

PLU000010 10.00T

1

PLU000020 8.50T

SUBTL 18.50

TAX 2.33

CASH 20.83

1CL

0276 12:52TM

TABLE NO

1

11-24-1999 WED #0

1

PLU000010 10.00T

1

PLU000020 8.50T

SUBTL 18.50

TAX 2.33

CASH 20.83

1CL 0280 12:53TM

Case 2: When the option “Guest check is printed on the slip” has been selected:

When a sale transaction is finalized by the media keys.

A slip has already been placed A slip has not been placed on the slip table yet.

on the slip table of the BRST-10

and the “SLIP” lamp on the

BRST-10 is illuminated.

A guest check print is automatically started. A guidance message “Please set paper.” is displayed

on the operator display.

When you want to When you want to

print a guest check print a guest check

on a slip. on the receipt roll

paper.

Insert a slip into the Depress the

slip slot to illuminate [RECEIPT PRINT]

the “SLIP” lamp, and key.

a guest check print is

automatically started.

NOTE: If a guest check print requires two slips or more, the “SLIP” lamp starts to blink after auto-ejecting a slip

which has just been printed. In this case, insert a new slip and the guest check print is automatically

restarted.

Guest Check Receipt Guest Check Slip

9.56 Check Print

You can issue a presentation for a sale transaction which has been temporarily finalized by the [TOTAL] key.

OPERATION

|Table No.| [PRINT CHECK] When your receipt printer is the TM-T88 or the TM-300, a

presentation print is automatically started.

When your receipt printer is the BRST-10, the print procedure is the

same as that of “Guest Check Print” shown on the preceding page.

NOTES: 1. The header “PRESENTATION” is printed at the top of a presentation. This operation can be

operated any number of times for the same order table No. The receipt consecutive No. is not

printed. Additional PLU items, if any, can still be entered after issuing a presentation.

1 to 999.9

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-32

9.57 Receipt Post-issue (Receipt Reprint & Guest Check Reprint)

TABLE NO

3

11-24-1999 WED #0

1

PLU000010 10.00T

1

PLU000020 8.50T

SUBTL 18.50

TAX 2.33

TOTAL 20.83

1CL

0355 18:23TM

Consecutive No. is printed

TABLE NO

3

11-24-1999 WED #0

******

***

PRESENTATION

******

***

1

PLU000010 10.00T

1

PLU000020 8.50T

SUBTL 18.50

TAX 2.33

TOTAL 20.83

1CL

18:23TM

The header “PRESENTATION” is printed.

9.57 Receipt Post-issue (Receipt Reprint & Guest Check Reprint)

OPERATION (must be operated outside a sale)

9.57.1 Receipt Reprint

■

Operated while the receipt-issue status is “ON”.

A sale transaction is A receipt for the [RECEIPT ISSUE] .............. A copy receipt

finalized by the media sale is issued. for the sale which

keys. has just been

finalized is issued.

■

Operated while the receipt-issue status is “OFF”.

A sale transaction is finalized [RECEIPT ISSUE] ....................A receipt for the sale which has just

by the media keys. been finalized is issued.

Programmable options:

• A post-issue receipt operation after issuing an ordinary receipt is prohibited.

• A post-issue receipt is always issued as a total-only receipt. If this option is not selected then the post-issue

receipt will be an itemized-receipt for a sales transaction of which print lines are below 50 or less. When the

print lines exceeds 50, a post-issue receipt becomes a total-only receipt.

• Operation of a post-issue receipt can be performed any number of times. If this option is not selected then the

operation can be performed only once.

NOTE: A post-issue receipt for the received-on-account or the paid-out transaction cannot be issued.

2. A program option allows you to use a presentation as a real guest check. If so programmed, the

header “PRESENTATION” is not printed. After issuing a guest check, only the sale finalization by

the media keys is allowed for the order table No.

Used as a presentation Used as a real guest check

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-33

|Cashier Code| [SERVER TRANS.] [AT/TL]

[↓] or [↑] [SELECT] [C] to cancel

9.57 Receipt Post-issue (Receipt Reprint & Guest Check Reprint)

9.57.2 Guest Check Reprint

|Order Table No.| [START CHECK] PLU items are [RECEIPT ISSUE] ............ A copy guest

entered and a check for the

guest check is sale which has

issued by a just been

sales transaction finalized is

finalized by the issued.

media keys.

The following operation is allowed when the program option “Presentation is used as a real guest check” has

been selected.

|Order Table No.| [PRINT CHECK] A guest check [RECEIPT ISSUE] ........... A copy guest

is issued. check is issued.

Programmable option:

• Operation of the guest check print can be performed any number of times. If this option is not selected then

the operation can be performed only once.

Ordinary Receipt Post-issue Receipt

1 to 999.9

11-23-1999 TUE

#0

**

*

COPY

**

*

1

PLU000010 10.00T

1

PLU000020 8.50T

SUBTL 18.50

TAX 2.33

CASH 20.83

ITEM 2

1CL

0378 11:56TM

The receipt consecutive No. printed on a post-issue receipt is

the same as that of an ordinary receipt.

11-23-1999 TUE

#0

1

PLU000010 10.00T

1

PLU000020 8.50T

SUBTL 18.50

TAX 2.33

CASH 20.83

ITEM 2

1CL

0378 11:56TM

A copy receipt header is printed

when a post-issue receipt is

issued after an ordinary receipt.

“INV COPY” is printed as a

copy guest check header.

. . .

Enter the cashier

code of the

destination

When all the accounts which appears in the operator display

are transferred.

To select an account you want

to transfer, move the cursor to it

using the [↓] or the [↑] key, then

depress the [SELECT] key.

Repeatable if multiple accounts are transferred.

9.58 Server Transfer

Account of order tables which are handled by a cashier can be partially or entirely transferred to another cashier’s

account.

OPERATION (must be operated outside a sale)

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-34

9.59 Employee Clock-in/Clock-out

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

SERVER TRANSFER

2

P1S1

1 8.50

3 10.00

TOTAL

18.50

ITEM

2

SERVER TRANSFER

2 0.00

TOTAL

0.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

9.59 Employee Clock-in/Clock-out

This operation records working total hours of each employee.

OPERATION (must be operated outside a sale)

■

Clock-in

Through the operator display

[IN] |Employee No.| [SERVER #] Select your job from a [ENTER] ....... Clock-in time is

or menu window using recorded.

[ENTER] the [↓] or the [↑] key.

Through the keyboard

A menu window appears. |Job No.|

1 to 9999

1 to 10

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

CLOCK IN 0001 P1S1

01 CASHIER

02 COOK

03 SERVER

0.01

TOTAL

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

Jobs assigned to

each employee

■

Break-in

[BREAK IN] |Employee No.| [SERVER #] [ENTER] ................. Break-in time is

or recorded.

[ENTER]

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

BREAK IN 0001 P1S1

Please verify name and hit Enter.

0.01

TOTAL

0.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES

EO1-11138

9-35

9.59 Employee Clock-in/Clock-out

■

Break-out

[BREAK OUT] |Employee No.| [SERVER #] [ENTER] ...............Break-out time is

or recorded.

[ENTER]

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

BREAK OUT 0001 P1S1

Please verify name and hit Enter.

0.01

TOTAL

0.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

■

Clock-out

[OUT] |Employee No.| [SERVER #] [ENTER] ............... Clock-out time is

or recorded.

[ENTER]

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

CLOCK OUT 0001 P1S1

Please verify name and hit Enter.

0.01

TOTAL

0.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

NOTES: 1. This operation is allowed only when the program options “Employee Management Adopted” and

“Floating Cashier Adopted” have been selected.

2. Clock-in/clock-out entry is allowed up to three times in a day.

3. Data of working total hours of each employee is collected to the employee clock-in/clock-out

report.

10. TROUBLESHOOTING

EO1-11138

10-1

10.1 Problems concerning the Power Supply

10. TROUBLESHOOTING

IN CASE OF A POWER FAILURE

If a power failure occurs during business hours, all the sales data stored in the memory will be

automatically protected by the battery installed in the register. When the power returns, the

register will resume displaying the screen which had been displayed just before the power failure.

The following are possible causes and countermeasures against typical problems. When a problem occurs, refer to

this chapter to find a cause of the problem, then take appropriate countermeasures. If a problem not described here

occurs, or a problem still exists after taking the following countermeasures, ask the store manager to contact your

authorized TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance. In this case, inform the store manager of your problem in

detail.

1. Problems concerning the Power Supply

2. Problems concerning the Keyboard

3. Problems concerning the Drawer

4. Problems concerning the Display

5. Problems during Normal Operations

WARNING!

If you cannot solve a problem with the following solutions, do not attempt to repair it yourself.

Turn the power off, then contact your TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance.

10.1 Problems concerning the Power Supply

■ Power is not turned ON.

Cause 1: Register is not plugged in.

Action: Plug in an outlet.

Cause 2: The power switch provided to the register is in the OFF position.

Action: Turn the power switch ON.

Cause 3: The outlet does not supply the power.

Action: Use another outlet.

10.2 Problems concerning the Keyboard

■ Key on the keyboard does not function.

Cause 1: Mode Lock is in the OFF position.

Action: Turn the Mode Lock to the positions other than OFF using the Mode Selector Key.

Cause 2: Failure of the keyboard itself

Action: Ask the store manager to contact your authorized TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance.

10. TROUBLESHOOTING

EO1-11138

10-2

10.3 Problems concerning the Drawer

■ Drawer does not open.

Cause 1: Drawer blocked by foreign substance (coin, etc.).

Action: Try to open the drawer by removing the foreign substance, using a ruler or something. If you are still

unable to open the drawer ask the store manager to contact your authorized TOSHIBA TEC

representative for assistance.

Cause 2: Failure of the drawer itself

Action: Ask the store manager to contact your authorized TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance.

10.4 Problems concerning the Display

10.4.1 Operator Display

■ Display blank.

Cause 1: Register is not securely plugged in.

Action: Securely plug in an outlet.

Cause 2: The operator display is in the power-save mode.

Action: Depress any key.

Cause 3: The brightness control provided to the operator display is adjusted improperly.

Action: Adjust it properly.

Cause 4: Failure of the LCD

Action: Ask the store manager to contact your authorized TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance.

10.4.2 Customer Display

■ Some segment is not displayed, display shimmers, or illumination of the display is uneven.

Cause 1: Failure of the display tube

Action: Ask the store manager to contact your authorized TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance.

10.5 Problems during Normal Operations

NOTE on changing the Mode Lock position:

Changing the Mode Lock position during sales entries or programming causes an error. To clear the error, return

the Mode Lock to the original position. However, changing the Mode Lock position to the OFF does not cause an

error. Error caused by changing the Mode Lock position cannot be cleared by the [C] key.

■ Normal operations cannot be carried out.

Cause 1: Mode Lock position does not correspond to the operation you attempted.

Action: Check whether or not the Mode Lock position corresponds to the operation. (Especially, check

whether or not the operation you attempted requires the MGR position. Ask your manager about the

operations which requires the MGR position.)

10.3 Problems concerning the Drawer

2. STAND-ALONE LEVEL

MANAGER’S GUIDE

Table of Contents

EO1-11138

FS-2600-1 SERIES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

1. MANAGER INTERVENTION ............................................................................1-1

1.1 Items Programmed to Require Manager Intervention......................................................1-1

1.2 Other Operations Requiring Manager Interventions ........................................................1-2

2. MANAGER’S OWN OPERATIONS IN “MGR” MODE ....................................2-1

2.1 Pick Up Operation............................................................................................................2-1

2.2 Enforced Sign-off of a Cashier (Code Entry Method) ......................................................2-1

2.3 Enforced Clock-out of an Employee ................................................................................2-2

2.4 PLU Menu Shift Entry ......................................................................................................2-2

2.5 RKP Table Change ..........................................................................................................2-3

3. OPERATIONS IN “ - ” MODE ........................................................................3-1

4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS ............................................................4-1

4.1 How to Access a Report Item ..........................................................................................4-1

4.2 Time Edit for Employee Clock-in/Clock-out .....................................................................4-8

4.3 Combination Reports .......................................................................................................4-9

4.4 General Notes on Report Takings .................................................................................4-10

4.5 Report Sample Format ..................................................................................................4-10

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS .....................................................................5-1

5.1 Before you enter the SET Mode ......................................................................................5-1

5.2 Character Entries .............................................................................................................5-2

5.3 Condition Required for Programming Operations............................................................5-4

5.4 How to Access a Program Item .......................................................................................5-5

■ Store Name/Message, Commercial Message,

Footer Logo Message Programming (Submode 1) ....................................................5-7

■ Cashier Programming (Submode 2) ...........................................................................5-8

■ Department Table Programming (Submode 3) ........................................................5-11

■ PLU Table Programming (Submode 4) ....................................................................5-17

■ Time Setting or Adjustment (Submode 5) ................................................................5-24

■ Date Setting or Adjustment (Submode 6) .................................................................5-25

■ Hourly Range Setting (Submode 7)..........................................................................5-26

■ Amount Limit Setting for Function Keys (Submode 8)..............................................5-27

■ Non-taxable Amount Limit Setting (for Canada)/

Gratuity Rate Setting (Submode 12) .......................................................................5-28

■ Minor Group Name Programming (Submode 13).....................................................5-29

■ Major Group Name Programming (Submode 14).....................................................5-30

■ Customer File Table Setting (Submode 15) .............................................................5-31

■ Combination Report Table Programming (Submode 19) .........................................5-32

■ PLU Stock Loading or Changing (Submode 24) ......................................................5-34

TOC 2

EO1-11138

FS-2600-1 SERIES

■ Tare Table and General Unit Weight Setting (Submode 26) ....................................5-35

■ PLU Preset-code Key/Display Key Setting (Submode 27) .......................................5-36

■ PLU Group Name Programming (Submode 29)......................................................5-38

■ RKP Message Programming (Submode 30) ...........................................................5-39

■ Display Message Programming (Submode 31) .......................................................5-40

■ Amount Limit Setting for the [DISC] Key (Submode 35)...........................................5-41

■ Set Menu Table Programming (Submode 42) ..........................................................5-42

■ Combo Sale Table Programming (Submode 43) .....................................................5-43

■ Guest Check Commercial Message Programming (Submode 45)...........................5-47

■ Day Part Setting (Submode 46)................................................................................5-48

■ Employee Table Setting (Submode 50)....................................................................5-49

■ Job Code/Working Hours Setting (Submode 51) .....................................................5-50

■ Tender Up Table Setting (Submode 52)...................................................................5-52

■ Display Menu Table Setting (Submode 53) ..............................................................5-53

■ PLU Preset Price Setting or Changing (Submode 60) .............................................5-55

■ Printer Table Setting (Submode 71) .........................................................................5-56

■ %+ and %- Preset Rate Setting ................................................................................5-58

■ Preset Rate Setting for Selective Itemizers (SI1 and SI2) ........................................5-59

■ Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Setting ................................................................5-61

■ Store/Register No. Setting ........................................................................................5-62

6. Verification of Programmed Data ..................................................................6-1

6.1 How to verify a Programmed Data through the Operator Display ...................................6-1

6.2 How to verify a Programmed Data through the Keyboard ...............................................6-2

TOC 1

1. MANAGER INTERVENTION

EO1-11138

1-1

1.1 Items Programmed to Require Manager Intervention

1. MANAGER INTERVENTION

1.1 Items Programmed to Require Manager Intervention

During daily sale entry operations, a cashier may call for Manager Interventions.

1) During operations, a cashier comes across an item that requires Manager Intervention. The cashier, already

informed of it, may immediately call for Manager Intervention. Or the cashier, without knowing of it, attempts

the operation, and an error results with the Error Message “MANAGER REQUIRED” displayed, clears the

error by the [C] key, and then calls for Manager Intervention.

2) The manager goes to the cashier counter with the MGR or MA key.

3) The cashier explains what kind of operation is attempted, and removes the REG key from the Mode Lock at

the “REG” position.

4) The manager inserts the MGR or MA key and turns it to the “MGR” position.

5) The cashier operates the required item.

6) The manager returns the MGR or MA key to the “REG” position and removes it .

7) The cashier sets the REG key to the “REG” position again and continues registering operations.

The following is the table of the keys and operations that are programmable with Manager Intervention. Fill in the

table by marking in the “Not Required” or “Required” column of each item.

KEYS/OPERATIONS AND MANAGER INTERVENTION STATUS TABLE

KEY Manager Intervention Reference

Not required Required

[DISC] As for the key status change, ask your TOSHIBA

[RECALL] TEC representative.

[TIP PAID]

[CHARGE TIP]

[%] ([% 1] to [% 8])

[VOID]

[PO]

[MENU 1] to [MENU 5]

[PRICE 1] to [PRICE 5]

[EX]

[ALL VOID]

[NS]

[RTR]

1. MANAGER INTERVENTION

EO1-11138

1-2

Credit Balance As for the status change, ask your TOSHIBA TEC

(NOTE 1 below)

representative.

Negative-balance Sale

Finalization by Media

Keys (except [AT/TL])

(NOTE 2)

Negative PLU Entries

Media Transfer

Guest Check Transfer

Guest Check Merge

Guest Check Split

PLU Price Read

PLU Stock Read

KEYS/OPERATIONS AND MANAGER INTERVENTION STATUS TABLE

(continued)

1.2 Other Operations Requiring Manager Interventions

OPERATION Manager Intervention Reference

Not required Required

NOTES: 1. The “Credit Balance” means that amount entries through [DISC], [VOID] will result in over-

subtraction of the subtotal amount at the time of the entry through any of those keys. If the status

“Not required” is selected, over-subtraction using these keys will be allowed in the “REG” mode.

However, over-subtraction using the [DISC] or [VOID] key is prohibited regardless of the credit

balance option if a sales transaction has been entered with an order table No. entry.

2. The “Negative-balance Sale” may be caused by:

1. Credit Balance of which status “Allowed” is selected.

2. Amounts entered through the [VOID] key (without an order table No. entry).

3. Amounts entered through negative PLUs.

4. Other negative amounts.

1.2 Other Operations Requiring Manager Interventions

Amount Limit Release

Amount Limits may be programmed on PLUs, Tender Media, [DISC]. These limits are programmed to check an

excessively high or low amount entry by cashier’s mistake at the earliest stage.

1) During sale entries by a cashier, an error occurs when a PLU item has been entered, or a key (one of the

media keys, the [DISC] key) has been depressed.

2) The cashier clears the error by the [C] key. The cashier confirms the amount and operates the item again.

3) If the same error occurs again, the cashier attempts to enter the amount using the [LC OPEN] or [OPEN] key.

4) If the operation results in an error again, the Amount Limit cannot be released by the [LC OPEN] or [OPEN] key.

5) The cashier calls for Manager Intervention.

The procedure thereafter is the same as Steps 2) to 7) for the Items Programmed to Require Manager

Intervention on the preceding page.

1. MANAGER INTERVENTION

EO1-11138

1-3

1.2 Other Operations Requiring Manager Interventions

Reference:

For reading the high and low amount limits of each PLU:

Chapter 6. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA Department Status Read

(Amount limit of each PLU is restricted by the amount limit of its linked department.)

For setting the item above:

Chapter 5. PROGRAMMING OPERATION Department Table Programming (Submode 3)

(Amount limit of each PLU is restricted by the amount limit of its linked department.)

For reading the common high and low amount limits of all the PLUs, and the high amount limit of each tender

media key:

Chapter 6. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA Function Key Amount Limit Read

For setting the item above:

Chapter 5. PROGRAMMING OPERATION Amount Limit Setting for Function Keys

(Submode 8)

For reading an amount limit of the [DISC] key:

Chapter 6. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA Dollar Discount Amount Limit Read

For setting the item above:

Chapter 5. PROGRAMMING OPERATION Amount Limit Setting for the [DISC] Key

(Submode 35)

2. MANAGER’S OWN OPERATIONS IN “MGR” MODE

EO1-11138

2-1

2. MANAGER’S OWN OPERATIONS IN “MGR” MODE

The following are operations possible only in the “MGR” position of the Mode Lock, which are performed by the

manager.

2.1 Pick Up Operation

This operation is used to collect money from a drawer, during the day, for banking purpose, etc.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale, in a Signed-ON condition.

OPERATION Mode Lock: MGR

[PO] |Media Amount Collected| [MEDIA KEY] ([ST]) [AT/TL]

2.1 Pick Up Operation

. . .

Drawer

opens.

NOTE 2

Repeat until all the collected media amounts are recorded.

NOTES: 1. Each media key can be programmed with its in-drawer limit. On reaching this limit in sale entries

(on finalizing a sales transaction), the Error Message “DRAWER LIMIT” is displayed with an

alarm generated to notify a cashier that the Pick Up operation is needed.

2. Depress the media keys corresponding to the collected media ([AT/TL] for cash). The media

keys that can be operated here are those programmed to print their media-in-drawer amounts in

reports.

3. Depress [ST], if necessary, to obtain the subtotal amount of the medias so far collected.

Max. 8 digits

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

*

SERVER DROP

*

CASH

300.00

CPN

150.00

TOTAL

450.00

TOTAL

450.00

TOTAL

450.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

01 to 99

2.2 Enforced Sign-off of a Cashier (Code Entry Method)

If a cashier once signed ON, then signed OUT to take a break does not come back, no one can operate the

register. In this case, the manager can perform this operation to forcibly release the cashier signed-OUT

condition.

CONDITION In a Signed-OUT condition

OPERATION Mode Lock: MGR

|2-digit manager-assign code| [SERVER #]............................... Same as a normal sign-OFF

2. MANAGER’S OWN OPERATIONS IN “MGR” MODE

EO1-11138

2-2

2.3 Enforced Clock-out of an Employee

1 to 9999

2.3 Enforced Clock-out of an Employee

If an employee who once clocked in forgets to perform the clock-out operation, the manager can perform this

operation.

CONDITION In a Clock-IN and Signed-OFF condition

OPERATION Mode Lock: MGR

[OUT] |Employee No.| [OUT]

with the 1st menu

. . .

Menu shift declaration

. . .

with shifted menu

2.4.2 Menu Shift Entry “Keeping the shifted Menu Level” Feature

You can shift the PLU menu level to another in the following two cases.

• Using the [MENU] key

The same key operation as “Effective only for One PLU Entry” Feature. However, the shifted menu level is

held until another [MENU] key is depressed.

• Using the Hourly Range Designation

Hourly range to start shifting each menu level can be programmed. If programmed, the menu level will be

automatically shifted to another when the hourly range starts.

2.4 PLU Menu Shift Entry

Up to five different menus can be programmed for each [PLU Preset-code Key] and you can select either of the

following two features.

2.4.1 Menu Shift Entry “Effective only for One PLU Entry” Feature

OPERATION Mode Lock: MGR

(PLU entries) [MENU 2] PLU entry ....................... After the PLU Entry, the

to menu mode automatically

[MENU 5] returns to the 1st menu mode.

or however the symbol “**” is

[ENTER] displayed at the right of an entered

clock-out time.

0 to 23 0 to 59

. . .

If necessary

Month-Day-Year (Initial Date Order)

Day-Month-Year

Year-Month-Day

2. MANAGER’S OWN OPERATIONS IN “MGR” MODE

EO1-11138

2-3

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

MENU3

0.00

TOTAL

0.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

NOTE: A program option allows you to perform this

operation in the REG mode.

1 to 4

2.5 RKP Table Change

This operation changes an RKP (remote kitchen printer) on which the data is outputted.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale

OPERATION Mode Lock: MGR

■ RKP Designation

|RKP No.| [RKP]

RKP of which No. is entered will be designated as the destination of the data output.

Example) If you operate 123 then [RKP], the RKPs of Nos. 1 to 3 will be designated.

If you operate 0 then [RKP], no RKPs will be designated.

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

RKP1 ON

RKP2 OFF

RKP3 OFF

RKP4 OFF

RKP

0.01

TOTAL

0.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

■ RKP Connection Table Change

[RKP] ........................ Each time you depress the [RKP] key, the RKP connection table is changed from 1 to

2, and vice versa.

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

1

R 1 1 ON

RKP1 1 2 ON

RKP2 0 OFF

RKP3 0 OFF

RKP4 0 OFF

J 0 OFF

RKP

0.00

TOTAL

0.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

Terminal

ID No.

Port

No.

2.5 RKP Table Change

RKP Connection

Table No. (1 or 2)

3. OPERATIONS IN “ - ” MODE

EO1-11138

3-1

3. OPERATIONS IN “ - ” MODE

When a cashier has entered some data in a guest order table buffer memory (started with an order table No.

entry and ended with the [TOTAL] key) and then all the entries must be cancelled, you can quickly delete them in

the - position of the Mode Lock instead of deleting items one by one using the [VOID] key. For a sale entered

without an order table No. entry, the - mode is available by doing the same operation in REG or MGR mode.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale

Turn the Mode Lock to the - position.

■ To delete sale items without an order table No. entry:

Enter the same items that were purchased in “REG” mode and the amount is subtracted from the memory.

Operator display in the REG or MGR mode Operator display in the - mode

¾®

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

1

PLU000010 10.00T

SUBTL 10.00

TAX 0.80

CASH

10.80

CASH

10.80

1 TOTAL

10.80

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

*

REG-

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

*

REG-

*

1

PLU000010 10.00T

SUBTL 10.00

TAX 0.80

CASH

10.80

CASH

10.80

1 TOTAL

10.80

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

■ To delete items ordered with an order table No. entry (Order Table No. Manual Entry):

|Order Table No.| [START CHECK] [ALL VOID] ............All the entry data of the table is deleted.

■ To delete items ordered with an order table No. (Order Table No. Automatic Entry):

|Order Table No.| [RECALL] [ALL VOID] ............All the entry data of the table is deleted.

Operator display in the REG or MGR mode Operator display in the - mode

¾®

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

TABLE NO

001

P1S1

1

PLU000001 1.00T

1

PLU000010 10.00T

NEW BALANCE001

11.90

2 TOTAL

11.90

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

*

REG-

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

TABLE NO

001

P1S1

*

REG-

*

1

PLU000001 1.00T

1

PLU000010 10.00

ALL VD

0.00

TOTAL

0.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

NOTE: You can cancel only an order table which has been temporarily finalized by the [TOTAL] key.

4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS

EO1-11138

4-1

4.1 How to Access a Report Item

WARNING!

When opening the cash drawer, be careful not to let the drawer hit any person.

4.1 How to Access a Report Item

Two ways are available to access a report item you want to issue; through the operator display and through the

keyboard.

4.1.1 How to Access a Report Item through the Operator Display

When you turn the mode selector key to the X or Z position, the initial screens shown below will appear.

X Mode Z Mode

4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS

This chapter describes the operation to take each report and its contents.

• A read (X) report allows you to read the totals but not clear the memory. After issuing a read report, only a

header of its report is written into the electronic journal buffer memory.

• A reset (Z) report allows you to read the totals and, at the same time, clear all the resettable totals. After

issuing a reset report, all the data of its report is written into the electronic journal buffer memory.

• A symbol “X” is printed at the top of a read report, while “Z” is printed on a reset report to indicate the type of

report.

• A reset report counter is printed on each reset report only.

• A daily report covers the data obtained during a certain period on that day until the corresponding reset report

is issued, while a periodic report covers the data obtained during a certain period defined by the store.

• When you issue a read report, make sure that the receipt-issue status is in “ON”. If the receipt-issue OFF

message is displayed in the operator display, depress the [SERVER#/RECEIPT] key so that the message

disappears. As for a reset report, it can be issued even while the receipt-issue OFF message is displayed.

*

X/GTX

*

02-06-1999 03:04

1 X

2 GTX

3 PROGRAM READ

4 E-JOURNAL

5 OTHERS

Please select operation by Enter key.

0.00

TOTAL

0.00

COMB1 COMB2 COMB3 EJ ↓

*

Z/GTZ

*

02-06-1999 03:04

1 Z

2 GTZ

3 E-JOURNAL

4 OTHERS

Please select operation by Enter key.

0.00

TOTAL

0.00

COMB1 COMB2 COMB3 EJ ↓

■ Description of each Navigation Key (Initial screen in X or Z)

13 13

14 14

15 15

••••*•••• ••••*•••• ••••*•••• ••••*••••

10 20 30 40

1

2

3

4

5

4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS

EO1-11138

4-2

4.1 How to Access a Report Item

Display Item Description

1 Navigation Key 1 COMB1 X Mode: Start key for the daily combination read report 1

Z Mode: Start key for the daily combination reset report 1

2 Navigation Key 2 COMB2 X Mode: Start key for the daily combination read report 2

Z Mode: Start key for the daily combination reset report 2

3 Navigation Key 3 COMB3 X Mode: Start key for the daily combination read report 3

Z Mode: Start key for the daily combination reset report 3

4 Navigation Key 4 EJ X Mode: Start key for the all electronic journal data read report

Z Mode: Start key for the all electronic journal data reset report

5 Navigation Key 5 ↓ Cursor key

Example) If you want to issue the daily all cashiers read report, operate as follows.

Select “1 X” from the initial screen using the cursor key, then depress the [ENTER] key. The screen shown below

appears.

*

X/GTX

*

02-06-1999 03:04

X

0 COMBINATION 10 HOURLY

1 COMBINATION1 11 DP

2 COMBINATION2 12 MEDIA

3 FINANCIAL 13 PLU

4 CLERK 14 STOCK

6 CREDIT 15 CUSTOMER

8 GROUP 24 PLU GROUP

9 MEDIA ALL 25 DAY PART

Please select operation by Enter key.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

Display Item Description

1 Navigation Key 1 Pg up Requests the preceding report item screen.

2 Navigation Key 2 Pg dw Requests the next report item screen.

3 Navigation Key 3 Enter Decides a selected item.

4 Navigation Key 4 ↑ Cursor Key

5 Navigation Key 5 ↓ Cursor key

In the X or Z mode, the navigation keys are changed as follows from the second screen or later.

→

To be Continued

4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS

EO1-11138

4-3

4.1 How to Access a Report Item

Continued

→

Select “4 CLERK” from the screen using the cursor key, then depress the [ENTER] key. The screen shown below

appears.

*

X/GTX

*

02-06-1999 03:04

X

1 ALL

2 INDIVIDUAL

Please select operation by Enter key.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

→

Select “1 ALL” from the screen using the cursor key, then depress the [ENTER] key. The screen shown below

appears.

*

X/GTX

*

02-06-1999 03:04

X CLERK

1 PRINT OUT

2 DISPLAY

Please select operation by Enter key.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

→

If you want to print out the report, select “1 PRINT OUT”, then depress the [ENTER] key.

If you only want to verify the report on the display, select “2 DISPLAY”, then depress the [ENTER] key.

NOTES: 1. If you want to cancel a selected item already decided by the [ENTER] key and go back to the

preceding screen, depress the [ESC] key.

2. If you want to interrupt a report print-out or a report display already started by the final [ENTER]

key, depress the [ITEM CORR] or the [VOID] key.

4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS

EO1-11138

4-4

4.1 How to Access a Report Item

Report Name Mode Key Operation Sample

Lock Page

3 [AT/TL] (Drawer opens.)

4 [ST] (Drawer opens.)

Code Entry Method:

4 [#] |Cashier ID Code| [AT/TL]

(2-digit manager-assign code)

Cashier Key Method:

Depress the required Cashier Key,

then 4 [AT/TL]

6 [AT/TL]

10 [AT/TL]

4.1.2 How to Access a Report Item through the Keyboard

You can directly access a report item you want to issue through a key operation on the keyboard.

■ Daily Reports

Repeatable

FINANCIAL READ AND RESET 4-10

• Financial Read X

• Financial Reset Z

CASHIER READ AND RESET 4-12

• All Cashier Read X

• All Cashier Reset Z

• Individual Cashier Read X

• Individual Cashier Reset Z

CREDIT CARD COMPANY SALES READ AND 4-12

RESET

• Credit Card Company Sales Read X

• Credit Card Company Sales Reset Z

DEPARTMENT GROUP READ X 8 [AT/TL] 4-13

MEDIA SALES AND IN-DRAWER TOTAL READ X 9 [AT/TL] (Drawer opens.) 4-13

HOURLY RANGE READ AND RESET 4-14

• Hourly Read X

• Hourly Reset Z

DEPARTMENT READ AND RESET 4-14

• All department Read X

• All department Reset Z

ALL MEDIA SALES TOTAL AND CASH-IN- X 12 [AT/TL] (Drawer opens.) 4-15

DRAWER READ

PLU READ AND RESET * 4-15

• Individual PLU Read X 13 [#] |PLU Code| [PLU] ([ST])

[AT/TL]

* (May be replaced by

[PLU Preset-code Key])

• Zone PLU Read X 13 [#]

Zone-start [X] Zone-end [AT/TL]

• Zone PLU Reset Z

PLU Code | PLU Code |

• All PLU Read X

• All PLU Reset Z

• Inactive PLU Read X 13 [#] 0 [AT/TL]

11 [AT/TL]

13 [AT/TL]

4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS

EO1-11138

4-5

Repeatable

■ Daily Reports

(Continued)

4.1 How to Access a Report Item

Report Name Mode Key Operation Sample

Lock Page

PLU STOCK READ 4-17

• Individual PLU Stock X 14 [#] |PLU Code| [PLU] [AT/TL]

• Zone PLU Stock X 14 [#]

Zone-start [X] Zone-end [AT/TL]

PLU Code | PLU Code |

• All PLU Stock X 14 [AT/TL]

CUSTOMER FILE READ AND RESET 4-17

• Individual File Read X 15 [#] |File Code| [X] [AT/TL]

• Zone File Read X 15 [#]

Zone-start [X] Zone-end [AT/TL]

• Zone File Reset Z

File Code | File Code |

• All File Read X

• All File Reset Z

• Inactive File Read X 15 [#] 0 [AT/TL]

PLU GROUP SALES READ AND RESET 4-18

• PLU Group Sales Read X

• PLU Group Sales Reset Z

DAY PART READ AND RESET 4-19

• Day Part Read X

• Day Part Reset Z

CHECK TRACK (Guest Order Table) WITH SALES 4-19

READ AND RESET

• All Cashier Read X

• All Cashier Reset Z

• Individual Cashier Read X

• Individual Cashier Reset Z

NOTE: You can check opened order tables.

CHECK TRACK (Guest Order Table) WITHOUT 4-20

SALES READ

• All Cashier X 31 [ST]

• Individual Cashier X

Code Entry Method:

31 [#] |Cashier ID Code| [AT/TL]

NOTE: You can check reserved order tables.

(2-digit manager-assign code)

Cashier Key Method:

Depress the required Cashier Key,

then 31 [AT/TL]

15 [AT/TL]

24 [AT/TL]

25 [AT/TL]

Code Entry Method:

30 [#] |Cashier ID Code| [AT/TL]

(2-digit manager-assign code)

Cashier Key Method:

Depress the required Cashier Key,

then 30 [AT/TL]

30 [ST]

4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS

EO1-11138

4-6

COMBO SALE READ AND RESET 4-20

• Individual Combo Read X

43 [#] |Combo Code| [#] ([ST]) [AT/TL]

• All Combo Read X

• All Combo Reset Z

• All Combo Read (detail) X

• All Combo Reset (detail) Z

HOURLY COMBO SALE READ AND RESET 4-21

• Hourly Combo Sale Read X

• Hourly Combo Sale Reset Z

EMPLOYEE CLOCK-IN/CLOCK-OUT READ AND 4-22

RESET

• Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Read X

• Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Reset Z

ELECTRONIC JOURNAL DATA READ AND 4-23

RESET

• All Data Read X

• All Data Reset Z

• Consecutive No./Date Read X

50 [#] 2 [#] |Consecutive No.| [#] |Date| [AT/TL]

• All Guest Check Read X 50 [#] 3 [#] [AT/TL]

• Cashier/Date Read X

50 [#] 4 [#] |Cashier ID Code| [#] (|Date|) [AT/TL]

• Clock-in/Clock-out/Date Read X 50 [#] 5 [#] (|Date|) [AT/TL]

• Transmission History Read X 50 [#] 6 [#] [AT/TL]

• EJ Buffer Remaining Line Read X 50 [#] 7 [#] [AT/TL] (Display only)

■ Daily Reports

(Continued)

4.1 How to Access a Report Item

Report Name Mode Key Operation Sample

Lock Page

Repeatable

44 [AT/TL]

43 [AT/TL]

43 [ST]

47 [AT/TL]

50 [AT/TL]

Max. 4 digits

Month-Day-Year

8 digits (NOTE below)

Either can be omitted.

(2-digit

manager-

assign

Code)

Month-Day-Year

8 digits (NOTE below)

* omissible

Month-Day-Year

8 digits (NOTE below)

* omissible

NOTE: A program option allows you to select the date order as follows.

• Month-Day-Year (Initial Date Order)

• Day-Month-Year

• Year-Month-Day

4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS

EO1-11138

4-7

■ GT Reports -- to be taken on weekly or monthly basis --

Report Name Mode Key Operation Sample

Lock Page

203 [AT/TL] (Drawer opens.)

204 [ST] (Drawer opens.)

206 [AT/TL]

4.1 How to Access a Report Item

211 [AT/TL]

224 [AT/TL]

247 [AT/TL]

248 [AT/TL]

213 [AT/TL]

Repeatable

FINANCIAL GT READ AND RESET 4-24

• Financial GT Read X

• Financial GT Reset Z

CASHIER GT READ AND RESET 4-24

• All Cashier GT Read X

• All Cashier GT Reset Z

• Individual Cashier GT Read X

Code Entry Method:

• Individual Cashier GT Reset Z 204 [#] |Cashier ID Code| [AT/TL]

(2-digit manager-assign code)

Cashier Key Method:

Depress the required Cashier Key,

then 204 [AT/TL]

CREDIT CARD COMPANY SALES GT READ 4-24

AND RESET

• Credit Card Company Sales GT Read X

• Credit Card Company Sales GT Reset Z

DEPARTMENT GROUP GT READ X 208 [AT/TL] 4-24

DEPARTMENT GT READ AND RESET 4-24

• All Department GT Read X

• All Department GT Reset Z

PLU GT READ AND RESET * 4-24

• Individual PLU GT Read X 213 [#] |PLU Code| [PLU] ([ST])

[AT/TL]

* (May be replaced by

[PLU Preset-code Key])

• Zone PLU GT Read X

213 [#] Zone-start [X] Zone-end [AT/TL]

• Zone PLU GT Reset Z

PLU Code | PLU Code |

• All PLU GT Read X

• All PLU GT Reset Z

• Inactive PLU GT Read X 213 [#] 0 [AT/TL]

PLU GROUP SALES GT READ AND RESET 4-24

• PLU Group Sales GT Read X

• PLU Group Sales GT Reset Z

EMPLOYEE CLOCK-IN/CLOCK-OUT GT READ 4-24

AND RESET

• Employee Clock-in/Clock-out GT Read X

(weekly)

• Employee Clock-in/Clock-out GT Reset Z

(weekly)

• Employee Clock-in/Clock-out GT Read X

(periodic)

• Employee Clock-in/Clock-out GT Reset Z

(periodic)

4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS

EO1-11138

4-8

→

4.1 How to Access a Report Item

4.2 Time Edit for Employee Clock-in/Clock-out

This operation is used to edit the recorded time of an employee clock-in/clock-out and total break hours.

CONDITION An employee of which recorded time is edited must be “Clock OUT”. Furthermore if the

employee has a cashier code, “Sign OFF” is also necessary.

OPERATION Mode Lock: Z (Allowed only through the operator display)

*

Z/GTZ

*

02-06-1999 03:04

Z EMPLOYEE

1 ALL

2 EDIT TIME

Please select operation by Enter key.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

*

Z/GTZ

*

02-06-1999 03:04

Z EMPLOYEE

EMPLOYEE COD 0

Please input Employee code.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

As described in section 4.1.1, select “47 EMPLOYEE”

from the screen using the cursor key, then depress the

[ENTER] key. The screen shown below appears.

Select “2 EDIT TIME” from the screen using the

cursor key, then depress the [ENTER] key. The

screen shown below appears.

→

*

Z/GTZ

*

02-06-1999 03:04

Z EMPLOYEE

0001

O001

01

CASHIER

IN

09:30

OUT

18:40

**

TOTAL BREAK

00:10

TOTAL HOURS

09:00

Please input data.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

Enter an employee code, then depress the [ENTER]

key. The screen shown below appears.

*

Z/GTZ

*

02-06-1999 03:04

Z EMPLOYEE

0001

O001

01

CASHIER

IN

09:30

OUT

17:40

TOTAL BREAK

00:10

TOTAL HOURS

08:00

Please input data.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

←

Select an item you want to edit from the screen using

the cursor key, enter time, then depress the [ENTER]

key. In this case, the clock-out time is changed from

17:40 to 18:40. A symbol “**” is displayed at the

right of the edited time and “TOTAL HOURS” is

automatically recalculated.

NOTE: You can designate and enter the date before the time entry, if necessary.

A program option allows you to select the date order as follows.

• Month-Day-Year (Initial Date Order)

• Day-Month-Year

• Year-Month-Day

4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS

EO1-11138

4-9

4.3 Combination Reports

You can issue a combination report which consists of a maximum of 5 reports selected from the list shown below,

and you can program your own 3 combination reports. As for the programming, refer to the next chapter

PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS.

REPORT NAME REPORT AVAILABLE

Financial Report X Z GTX GTZ

All Cashier Report X Z GTX GTZ

Credit Company Sales Report X Z GTX GTZ

Department Group Report X GTX

Media Sales and In-drawer Report X

Hourly Range Report X Z

All Department Report X Z GTX GTZ

All Media Sales & Cash-in-drawer Report X

All PLU Report X Z GTX GTZ

All PLU Stock Report X

All Guest File Report X Z

PLU Group Sales Report X Z GTX GTZ

Day Part Report X Z

Check Track with Sales Report (All Cashier) X Z

Check Track without Sales Report (All Cashier) X

All Combo Sale Report (detail) X Z

Hourly Combo Sale Report X Z

Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Report X Z

Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Report (weekly) GTX GTZ

Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Report (periodic) GTX GTZ

KEY OPERATION: Mode Lock: X for Read

Z for Reset

Enter the Report No.:

None (simply depress [AT/TL]): Daily Combination Report 1

200: GT Combination Report 1

1: Daily Combination Report 2

201: GT Combination Report 2

2: Daily Combination Report 3

202: GT Combination Report 3

* As for the daily combination reports 1 to 3, you can issue them by simply depressing the corresponding

navigation keys COMB1 to COMB3.

NOTES: 1. If a report in which the issue mode does not match the mode lock position to take a combination

report is contained in a combination report table, that report issuance will be skipped.

2. The all department report and the financial report are initially programmed to the combination

report 1 (daily and GT).

3. Whether the drawer opens or not depends on the reports contained in a combination report table.

4.3 Combination Reports

| | [AT/TL]

4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS

EO1-11138

4-10

Date, Day-of-Week, Register No.

Report Symbol, Report Name

Grand Total

Net GT

Gross Sale Item Count, Amount

Percent Charge Operation Count, Amount

Net Sale without Tax Item Count, Amount

Tax 1 Amount

Tax 2 Amount

Manual Tax Amount

Net Sale with Tax Item Count, Amount

Charge Tip Operation Count, Amount

Positive Other Income Department Item Count, Amount

Percent Discount on Subtotal Operation Count, Amount

Dollar Discount on Subtotal Operation Count, Amount

Gratuity Operation Count, Amount

All Media Sales Customer Count, Amount

Open Order Table (Unpaid Account) Customer Count, Amount

Cash Sales Customer Count, Amount

Check Sales Customer Count, Amount

Charge Sales Customer Count, Amount

Misc. Media Sales Customer Count, Amount

Coupon Sales Customer Count, Amount

Charge Posting by Check Track Customer Count, Amount

Received-on-Account Operation Count, Amount

Paid Out Operation Count, Amount

Loan Amount if selected to print by

Pick Up Operation Count, Amount a program option

4.4 General Notes on Report Takings

1. The cashier signed-OFF or signed-OUT condition is required for taking any X or Z reports in the Code Entry

Method. (Otherwise, an error will result when the Mode Lock is turned to the “X” or “Z” position.)

2. The [ITEM CORR] (or [VOID]) key may be depressed anytime during the printing of a report, for the purpose

of aborting the receipt issuance. When a report abort has been operated for a reset report, the memory of the

report data will not be cleared.

3. The drawer opens at the start of printing for those reports which are noted with “(Drawer opens)” in the Daily

and GT report table. However, a program option allows you to take the financial report while the drawer

remains closed.

4.5 Report Sample Format

Shown below are sample formats of the respective reports. In referring to those formats, please note the

following:

• The data contents are merely examples to show a report format. The numeric data may not balance correctly.

4.5.1 Financial Read or Reset Report (Daily or Periodic)

11-29-1999 MON

#3001

Z03

Z_FINANCIAL

GT

1177.40

NET GT 1177.20

GS

161 1177.40

%+ 1 0.13

NS

150 990.94

TAX1 37.35

TAX2 61.80

TAX5 4.56

NS

150 1094.65

CHG TIP 1 2.80

HASH DP 1 18.00

%- 2 1.36

DISC 1 0.10

GRATUITY 4 3.21

TOTAL 39CU 1117.20

OPEN TABLE 6CU 184.06

CASH 25CU 481.31

CHECK 0CU 60.00

Chg 7CU 242.59

MISC 0CU 15.00

CPN 0CU 1.00

CRT TL5 2CU 117.45

R/A 2 30.00

PO 1 5.00

LOAN 171.37

PICK UP 1 5.00

-- To be continued --

Tax 3 & Tax 4 Amount if any

See NOTE

on the next

page.

Credit 1 to Credit 4

Sales Customer

Count, Amount if any

Combo Sale Discount

Amount if the option “Combo

Sale” has been selected.

Percent Discount 2 to 8

on Subtotal Operation

Count, Amount if any

Negative Other

Income

Department

Item Count,

Amount if any

4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS

EO1-11138

4-11

Cash-in-drawer Amount

Operation Count & In-drawer Amount for each non-cash media

Tip Paid Operation Count, Amount

Item Correct Operation Count, Amount

Void Operation (for PLU item) Count, Amount

All Void Operation Count, Amount

Percent Discount on PLU item Operation Count, Amount

Negative Department Total Item Count, Amount

Negative Balance Sale Customer Count, Amount

Taxable Total 1 (Sale Amount subject to Tax 1 taxation)

Taxable Total 2 (Sale Amount subject to Tax 2 taxation)

Tax Exempted Customer Count

Sale Portion Exempted from Tax 1

Guest Total

Foreign Currency 1 Operation Count, Amount

Foreign Currency 2 Operation Count, Amount

Sales Item Count per Customer

Net Sale per Customer

No-sale Operation Count

Tray Total Operation Count

Financial Reset Report Count

(printed on the reset report only)

Receipt Consecutive No., Time

CASH ID 171.37

CHECK ID 4 160.00

Chg ID 7 242.59

MISC ID 3 15.00

CPN ID 1 1.00

CRT ID5 2 117.45

TIP PAID 1 24.50

CORR 2 11.00

VOID 2 13.00

ALL VD 1 49.50

%- 1 0.24

-DP TL 1 3.00

-SALE 2CU 3.00

TXBL1 391.45

TXBL2 904.40

TAX EX 1CU

TAX1EX 5.00

GUEST 41CU

CUR1 3 315.96

CUR2 3 115.00

ITEM/CUS 3.85

NS /CUS 25.41

NO SALE 2

TRAY CTR 35

0001Z

0290 21:54TM

-- Continued --

4.5 Report Sample Format

See

NOTE

below

Operation Count &

Amount for each

Foreign Currency 3

to 5 if any

Sale Portions

Exempted from

Tax 2 to 4 if any

Taxable Total 3 & 4 if any

Selective Itemizer 1 & 2

Operation Count, Amount if any

Eat-in/Takeout Customer

Count, Amount if the

option “Eat-in/Takeout”

has been selected.

Negative Mode ( - )

Operation Count,

Amount if any

Negative Tax Amount if any

Percent Discount 2 to 8 on PLU item

Operation Count, Amount if any

Dollar Discount on PLU item

Operation Count, Amount if any

Misc. Void Operation (other than

PLU item) Count, Amount if any

NOTE: Print items surrounded by a dotted line are

printed on a daily report only but not on a

periodic report.

4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS

EO1-11138

4-12

4.5.2 Cashier Read or Reset Report (Daily or Periodic)

■ Individual Cashier Read Report Sample

4.5 Report Sample Format

Cashier Code and Cashier Name

Same contents as the financial report except:

• Data of GT and Net GT is not printed.

• Data of Server Transfer and Tip Percentage, if any, is printed.

11-29-1999 MON

#3001

X04

X_CLERK

02

2CLDYER

GS

50 354.90

NS

43 269.00

TAX1 9.40

TAX2 16.64

TAX5 4.56

NS

43 299.60

CHG TIP 1 2.80

DISC 1 0.10

TOTAL 11CU 302.30

OPEN TABLE 3CU 84.40

CASH 5CU 91.10

Chg 3CU 114.31

MISC 0CU 5.00

CPN 0CU 1.00

CASH ID 1.60

Chg ID 3 114.31

MISC ID 1 5.00

CPN ID 1 1.00

TIP PAID 1 24.50

ALL VD 1 49.50

-DP TL 1 3.00

-SALE 1CU 3.00

TXBL1 102.00

TXBL2 245.00

TAX EX 1CU

TAX1EX 5.00

GUEST 12CU

CUR1 1 200.00

ITEM/CUS 3.91

NS /CUS 25.45

TRAY CTR 8

0243 22:33TM

4.5.3 Credit Card Company Sales Read or Reset Report (Daily or Periodic)

11-29-1999 MON

#3001

X06

X_CREDIT

01

CRT01 1 21.97

02

CRT02 1 50.77

03

CRT03 1 28.46

TOTAL 3 101.20

0240 22:29TM

Company Code, Company Name, Operation Count, Amount

Total of Operation Count and Amount

4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS

EO1-11138

4-13

4.5.4 Department Group Read Report (Daily or Periodic)

4.5 Report Sample Format

11-29-1999 MON

#3001

X08

X_GROUP

GP

01

93 42.01% 413.05

GP

02

50 56.47% 555.26

GP

03

1 1.53% 15.00

TOTAL 144 983.31

MGP

01

44 6.81% 66.95

MGP

02

49 35.20% 346.10

MGP

03

34 36.94% 363.26

MGP

04

16 19.53% 192.00

MGP

05

1 1.53% 15.00

TOTAL 144 983.31

0239 22:29TM

Minor Group 1

Item Count, Sales Percentage, Amount

Total of Item Count and Amount

Major Group 1

Item Count, Sales Percentage, Amount

Total of Item Count and Amount

4.5.5 Media Sales and In-drawer Total Read Report (Daily)

11-29-1999 MON

#3001

X09

X_MEDIA_ALL

TOTAL 38CU 1087.57

CASH 23CU 451.68

CHECK 0CU 60.00

Chg 7CU 242.59

MISC 0CU 15.00

CPN 0CU 1.00

CRT TL5 2CU 117.45

CASH ID 141.74

CHECK ID 4 160.00

Chg ID 7 242.59

MISC ID 3 15.00

CPN ID 1 1.00

CRT ID5 2 117.45

CUR1 3 315.96

CUR2 3 115.00

0226 22:18TM

All Media Sales Customer Count, Amount

Each Media Sale Customer Count, Amount

Each Media-in-drawer Operation Count, Amount

(operation count for cash is not printed)

Each Foreign Currency-in-drawer

Operation Count, Amount

4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS

EO1-11138

4-14

4.5.6 Hourly Range Read or Reset Report (Daily)

4.5 Report Sample Format

11-29-1999 MON

#3001

X10

X_HOURLY

10:00TM

8 3CU 63.64

12:00TM

24 6CU 160.53

14:00TM

44 11CU 326.54

16:00TM

19 4CU 174.64

18:00TM

5 1CU 32.76

20:00TM

24 8CU 143.03

22:00TM

19 5CU 167.09

0238 22:28TM

Hourly Range 10:01 to 12:00

Item Count, Customer Count, Amount

Hourly Range 12:01 to 14:00

Hourly Range 14:01 to 16:00

Hourly Range 16:01 to 18:00

Hourly Range 18:01 to 20:00

Hourly Range 20:01 to 22:00

Hourly Range 22:01 and thereafter

11-29-1999 MON

#3001

X11

X_DP_ALL

DP

01

28 2.86% 27.65

DISC 0 0.00

DP

02

16 4.06% 39.30

DISC 0 0.00

DP

03

19 9.69% 93.80

DISC 0 0.00

DP

04

30 26.06% 252.30

DISC 0 0.00

DP

05

17 20.94% 202.76

DISC 1 0.24

TOTAL 143 968.31

-TOTAL 1 -3.00

0237 22:27TM

Department 1

Item Count, Sales Percentage (NOTE below), Amount

Dollar Discount or %- Operation Count, Amount (Optional Print)

Total of Positive Departments Item Count, Amount

Total of Negative Departments Item Count, Amount

4.5.7 Department Read or Reset Report (Daily or Periodic)

NOTE: A program option allows you to print “Customer Count” instead of “Sales Percentage”.

4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS

EO1-11138

4-15

4.5.8 All Media Sales Total and Cash-in-Drawer Read Report (Daily)

4.5 Report Sample Format

11-29-1999 MON

#3001

X12

X_MEDIA

TOTAL 38CU 1087.57

CASH ID 141.74

0227 22:19TM

All Media Sales Customer Count, Amount

Cash-in-drawer Amount

4.5.9 PLU Read or Reset Report (Daily or Periodic)

■ Individual PLU Read Report (Daily or Periodic)

PLU Code 1, PLU Name

Price Levels 1 ~ 5 Item Count, Amount

Total Item Count, Amount of Price Levels 1 to 5

PLU Code 2 Data

Total Data of PLU Code 1 and PLU Code 2

11-29-1999 MON

#3001

X13

X_PLU_INDIV

000001 PLU000001

P1 27 27.00

P2 0 0.00

P3 1 0.65

P4 0 0.00

P5 0 0.00

TL 28 27.65

000002 PLU000002

P1 15 37.50

P2 0 0.00

P3 1 1.80

P4 0 0.00

P5 0 0.00

TL 16 39.30

TOTAL

P1 42 64.50

P2 0 0.00

P3 2 2.45

P4 0 0.00

P5 0 0.00

TL 44 66.95

0230 22:22TM

4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS

EO1-11138

4-16

■ All PLU Read or Reset Report (Daily or Periodic)

4.5 Report Sample Format

PLU Code 1, PLU Name

Price Level 1 Item Count, Amount

Total Item Count, Amount of Price Levels 1 to 5

PLU Code 2 Data

PLU Code 3 Data

PLU Code 4 Data

PLU Code 5 Data

Total of Positive PLUs Item Count, Amount

Total of Negative PLUs Item Count, Amount

11-29-1999 MON

#3001

X13

X_PLU_ALL

000001 PLU000001

P1 27 27.00

P3 1 0.65

TL 28 27.65

000002 PLU000002

P1 15 37.50

P3 1 1.80

TL 16 39.30

000003 PLU000003

P1 18 90.00

P3 1 3.80

TL 19 93.80

000004 PLU000004

P1 27 229.50

P2 2 15.60

P3 1 7.20

TL 30 252.30

000005 PLU000005

P1 16 192.00

P2 1 11.00

TL 17 203.00

TOTAL

P1 135 920.00

P2 4 35.10

P3 4 13.45

TL 143 968.55

-TOTAL

P1 1 -3.00

TL 1 -3.00

0232 22:24TM

NOTE: All PLU Report can be programmed to not print items and price levels having zero totals.

X13

X_PLU_ZONE

000001-000005

■ Zone PLU Read or Reset Report (Daily or Periodic)

The format is the same as “All PLU Read or Reset Report” above. The only difference is that the Zone Read

or Reset Report outputs the PLUs in the zone designated by the key operation to take the report.

■ Inactive PLU Read Report (Daily or Periodic)

PLU Code, PLU Name

11-29-1999 MON

#3001

X13

X_PLU_ZERO

000015 PLU000015

0233 22:25TM

4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS

EO1-11138

4-17

4.5 Report Sample Format

4.5.10 PLU Stock Read Report (Daily)

■ Individual PLU Stock Read Report (Daily)

PLU Code 7, PLU Name

Minimum Stock Quantity, Current Stock Quantity

11-29-1999 MON

#3001

X14

X_STOCK_INDI

000007 PLU000007

0 348

0234 22:25TM

■ All PLU Stock Read Report (Daily)

PLU Code 4, PLU Name

Minimum Stock Quantity, Current Stock Quantity

11-29-1999 MON

#3001

X14

X_STOCK_ALL

000004 PLU000004

0 520

000005 PLU000005

0 133

000006 PLU000006

0 433

000007 PLU000007

0 348

000008 PLU000008

0 176

0236 22:27TM

X14

X_STOCK_ZONE

000004-000007

Zone designation

4.5.11 Customer File Read or Reset Report (Daily)

■ Individual Customer File Read Report (Daily)

Customer File Code 1, Customer Name

Operation Count, Balance

11-29-1999 MON

#3001

X15

X_CUST_INDIV

#000000000001 RENO

1 54.70

0247 22:36TM

■ Zone PLU Stock Read Report (Daily)

The format is the same as “All PLU Stock Read Report” above. The only difference is that the Zone Read

Report outputs the stock data of the PLUs in the zone designated by the key operation to take the report.

4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS

EO1-11138

4-18

4.5 Report Sample Format

■ All Customer File Read or Reset Report (Daily)

Customer File Code 1, Customer Name

Operation Count, Balance

Customer File Code 2 Data

11-29-1999 MON

#3001

X15

X_CUST_ALL

#000000000001 RENO

1 54.70

#000000000002 SMITH

1 62.75

0246 22:35TM

X15

X_CUST_ZONE

000000000001

_

000000000010

■ Zone Customer File Read or Reset Report (Daily)

The format is the same as “All Customer File Read or Reset Report” above. The only difference is that the

Zone Read or Reset Report outputs the data of the customer files in the zone designated by the key operation

to take the report.

■ Inactive Customer File Read Report (Daily)

Customer File Code, Customer Name

11-29-1999 MON

#3001

X15

X_CUST_ZERO

#000000000003 BECKHAM

#000000000004 JOHNSON

#000000000005 SHEARER

0249 22:37TM

4.5.12 PLU Group Read or Reset Report (Daily or Periodic)

11-29-1999 MON

#3001

X24

X_PLU_GROUP

PLU GP01

44 6.81% 66.95

PLU GP02

49 35.19% 346.10

PLU GP03

34 36.96% 363.50

PLU GP04

16 19.52% 192.00

PLU GP05

1 1.53% 15.00

TOTAL 144 983.55

0250 22:37TM

PLU Group 1

Item Count, Sales Percentage, Amount

Total of Item Count and Amount

4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS

EO1-11138

4-19

4.5.13 Day Part Read or Reset Report (Daily)

4.5 Report Sample Format

11-29-1999 MON

#3001

X25

X_DAY_PART

10:00TM

MGP

01

11 15.50

MGP

02

13 93.00

MGP

03

4 45.50

MGP

04

4 52.00

MGP

05

1 15.00

14:00TM

MGP

01

16 20.95

MGP

02

20 145.10

MGP

03

19 196.00

MGP

04

8 92.00

18:00TM

MGP

01

17 30.50

MGP

02

16 108.00

MGP

03

11 121.76

MGP

04

4 48.00

0251 22:37TM

Hourly Range 10:01 to 14:00

Major Group 1

Item Count, Amount

Hourly Range 14:01 to 18:00

Hourly Range 18:01 and thereafter

4.5.14 Check Track (Guest Order Table) with Sales Read or Reset Report (Daily)

■ Individual Cashier Read Report Sample

Cashier Code, Cashier Name

Order Table No., Amount remaining unpaid

11-29-1999 MON

#3001

X30

X_CT_W_INDI

02

2CLDYER

#018 43.40

#021 32.50

#025 8.50

TOTAL 3 84.40

0253 22:38TM

4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS

EO1-11138

4-20

■ Combo Sales Detail Read or Reset Report (Daily)

4.5.15 Check Track (Guest Order Table) without Sales Read Report (Daily)

■ Individual Cashier Read Report Sample

4.5 Report Sample Format

Cashier Code, Cashier Name

Reserved Order Table

Total of reserved Order Table

11-29-1999 MON

#3001

X31

X_CT_WO_INDI

02

2CLDYER

#003 #004 #005 #011

#015

TOTAL 5

0256 22:40TM

4.5.16 Combo Sales Read or Reset Report (Daily)

Available only when the feature “Combo Sales” has been selected.

■ Combo Sales Total Read or Reset Report (Daily)

Combo Sales Total

Total of Operation Count and Combo Discount Amount

11-29-1999 MON

#3001

X43

X_COMBO_SUM

COMBO TOTAL 1235.12

100 423.89

0121 20:30TM

Combo Code, Combo Name, Combo Sales Amount

Operation Count, Combo Discount Amount

Combo Sales Total

Total of Operation Count and Combo Discount Amount

11-29-1999 MON

#3001

X43

X_COMBO_ALL

01

COMBO1 98.56

9 21.20

02

COMBO2 153.41

5 43.00

COMBO TOTAL 1235.12

100 423.89

0122 20:30TM

4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS

EO1-11138

4-21

■ Individual Combo Sale Read Report (Daily)

Combo Code, Combo Name, Combo Sales Amount

Operation Count, Combo Discount Amount

Combo Sales Total

Total of Operation Count and Combo Discount Amount

11-29-1999 MON

#3001

X43

X_COMBO_INDI

01

COMBO1 98.56

9 21.20

COMBO TOTAL 98.56

9 21.20

0123 20:30TM

4.5.17 Hourly Range Combo Sales Read or Reset Report (Daily)

Available only when the feature “Combo Sales” has been selected and also a combo sale table has been linked

to each hourly range.

Hourly Range 10:01 to 11:00

Combo Sales Amount

Operation Count, Combo Discount Amount

Combo Sales Total

Total of Operation Count and Combo Discount Amount

11-29-1999 MON

#3001

X44

X_COMBO_PERI

10:00TM

COMBO TOTAL 96.24

9 41.12

11:00TM

COMBO TOTAL 100.62

9 48.28

COMBO TOTAL 324.28

56 198.22

0124 20:31TM

4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS

EO1-11138

4-22

4.5.18 Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Read or Reset Report (Daily, Weekly or Periodic)

4.5 Report Sample Format

11-29-1999 MON

#3001

X47

X_EMPLOYEE

0001

JONES

01

CASHIER

CLOCK IN

09:30

CLOCK OUT

22:30

TOTAL BREAK

04:09

TOTAL HOURS

08:51

12

********************************

****************

01

CASHIER

REGULAR HOUR

08:00

O/T HOURS

00:51

12

********************************

****************

TOTAL

REGULAR HOUR

08:00

O/T HOURS

00:51

0005

FELDER

03

COOK

CLOCK IN

09:33

CLOCK OUT

22:12

TOTAL BREAK

00:00

TOTAL HOURS

12:39

12

********************************

****************

03

COOK

REGULAR HOUR

08:00

O/T HOURS

04:39

12

********************************

****************

TOTAL

REGULAR HOUR

08:00

O/T HOURS

04:39

0251 22:37TM

Employee Code, Employee Name

Job Code, Job Name

Job Start Time

Job End Time

Break Hours Total on each Job

Working Hours Total on each Job

Regular Working Hours on each Job

Overtime Hours on each Job

Regular Working Hours Total

Overtime Hours Total

4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS

EO1-11138

4-23

4.5.19 Electronic Journal Read or Reset Report (Daily)

■ All Electronic Journal Read or Reset Report (Daily)

4.5 Report Sample Format

11-29-1999 MON

#3001

X50

X_EJ_ALL

11-29-1999 MON

#3001

**

*

CLOCK IN

**

*

1

0001

1 09:30

0066 09:30TM

11-29-1999 MON

#3001

**

*

CLOCK IN

**

*

2

0002

1 09:31

0067 09:31TM

11-29-1999 MON

#3001

**

*

CLOCK IN

**

*

3

0003

1 09:31

0068 09:31TM

11-29-1999 MON

#3001

X47

X_EMPLOYEE

0261 22:44TM

11-29-1999 MON

#3001

X248

GTX_EMPLOYEE

0262 22:45TM

0263 22:45TM

All the data stored in the electronic journal buffer memory is printed.

X50

X_EJ_CONSNO

■ Electronic Journal (Consecutive No./Date) Read Report (Daily)

X50

X_EJ_INVOICE

Data corresponding to the designated consecutive No./date is printed.

■ Electronic Journal (All Guest Check) Read Report (Daily)

X50

X_EJ_CLERK

Data of all the guest checks is printed.

■ Electronic Journal (Cashier/Date) Read Report (Daily)

Data corresponding to the designated cashier/date is printed.

4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS

EO1-11138

4-24

4.6 GT REPORTS

X50

X_EJ_EMPLOYE

X50

X_EJ_HISTORY

■ Electronic Journal (Clock-in & Clock-out/Date) Read Report (Daily)

Data regarding the employee clock-in/clock-out is printed.

■ Electronic Journal (Transmission History) Read Report (Daily)

Data of the transmission history is printed.

4.6 GT Reports

The print form and items of a GT report are the same as those of its corresponding daily report, except the report

header portion. Please also note that some items provided in the daily report are not provided in its GT reports.

The counters and totals in a GT report are records accumulated for a certain period (week, month, etc.) while

those counters and totals in the daily report are usually records for a day. The accumulated record data in each

GT report will be reset when its GTZ report has been taken.

Header Example

→

X11

X_DP_ALL

X211

GTX_DP_ALL

Department Read Report (Daily) Department GT Read Report

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-1

5.1 Before you enter the SET Mode

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

This chapter is provided for the store programmer or the store manager who may have to change the programmed

data of the FS-2600 series ECR on the daily, weekly, or monthly basis. Usually, all the basic program data required

for your store should have already been set before delivery of the product by your local TOSHIBA TEC representative.

However, if it becomes necessary to change or add program data, please refer to this chapter. It is also recommended

that you read the OPERATOR’S GUIDE as well as other chapters of the MANAGER’S GUIDE in order to thoroughly

understand the descriptions in this chapter. If there are any unclear points or program data other than listed here that

must be changed or added, please contact your TOSHIBA TEC representative.

WARNING!

Never try to access a program item other than those shown in this chapter. If you access it

and mistakenly change important data, a malfunction may occur on your completed system.

5.1 Before you enter the SET Mode

Please note that you should use the REG Mode Keyboard Sheet or the SET Mode Keyboard Sheet that is proper

for each program item. The SET Mode Keyboard Sheet is printed on the reverse side of the REG Mode

Keyboard Sheet. Refer to the following list.

5.1.1 Program items that require the REG Mode Keyboard Sheet

• PLU Stock Loading and Changing (Submode 24)

• PLU Preset-code Key and Display Key Setting (Submode 27)

• PLU Preset Price Setting and Changing (Submode 60)

• %+ and %- Rate Setting

• Selective Itemizer Rate Setting

• Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Setting

• Store/Register No. Setting

5.1.2 Program items that require the SET Mode Keyboard Sheet

• Store Name/Message, Commercial Message, Footer Logo Message Programming (Submode 1)

• Cashier Programming (Submode 2)

• Department Table Programming (Submode 3)

• PLU Table Setting (Submode 4)

• Time Setting and Adjustment (Submode 5)

• Date Setting and Adjustment (Submode 6)

• Hourly Range Setting (Submode 7)

• Amount Limit Setting for Function Keys and Guests (Submode 8)

• Non-taxable Limit Amount and Gratuity Rate Setting (Submode 12)

• Minor Group Name Programming (Submode 13)

• Major Group Name Programming (Submode 14)

• Guest File Table Setting (Submode 15)

• Combination Report Table Programming (Submode 19)

• Tare Table and Scale Unit Weight Programming (Submode 26)

• PLU Group Name Programming (Submode 29)

• RKP Message Programming (Submode 30)

• Display Message Programming (Submode 31)

• Amount Limit Setting for the [DISC] Key (Submode 35)

• Set Menu Table Programming (Submode 42)

• Combo Sale Table Programming (Submode 43)

• Guest Check Commercial Message Programming (Submode 45)

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-2

5.2 Character Entries

• Day Part Setting (Submode 46)

• Employee Table Setting (Submode 50)

• Job Code/Working Hour Setting (Submode 51)

• Tender Up Table Setting (Submode 52)

• Display Menu Table Setting (Submode 53)

• Printer Setting (Submode 71)

5.2 Character Entries

Two ways are available to enter characters for the various names and messages; character code entry method

and direct character entry method.

CHARACTER CODE ENTRY Method

This method is to set a character by entering a Character Code and depressing the [#] key.

DIRECT CHARACTER ENTRY Method

This method is to set a character by directly depressing a character key which has been printed on the SET

mode keyboard sheet.

5.2.1 Character Code Entry Method

■ Character Code Table

Column Code

Row

Code

23456789101112131415

00 0 @ P p \

01 ! 1 A Q a q II

02 " 2 B R b r III

03 # 3 C S c s II

04 $ 4 D T d t , 1/2

05 % 5 E U e u D 1/4

06 & 6 F V f v ★

07 7 G W g w C

08 ( 8 H X h x kg

09 ) 9 I Y i y ¢ lb

10 * :JZjz £ No

11 + ; K [ k { x

12 , < L l |

13 - = M ] m }

14 . > N ^ n ~

15/ ?O_o |

()

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-3

5.2 Character Entries

NOTE: Characters corresponding to the following codes can be used only for display but not for print.

715, 1206, 1207, 1214, 1215, 1301, 1302, 1303, 1304, 1500, 1501, 1502, 1503, 1506, 1507, 1508,

1509, 1510, 1512, 1513, 1514, 1515, 1305 (applicable to the TM-300 only)

■ How to Set a Character

• To set a regular-sized character, enter a column code and then a row code, followed by the [#] key.

ex.) To set “%”, enter 205 and depress [#].

To set “kg”, enter 1508, and depress [#].

• To set a blank instead of a character, simply depress [#] without a prior code entry, or enter 200 and depress [#].

• Depress the [X] key once prior to a regular-sized character entry, and it will be a double-sized character (a

blank will also be double-sized) .

ex.) To set “GROUP”, “G” in double-sized, and “ROUP” in regular-sized:

[X] 407 [#] 502 [#] 415 [#] 505 [#] 500 [#]

G ROU P

• Depress the [X] key twice prior to the first character code entry to set the entire message line or entered name

with all double-sized characters.

ex.) To set “GROUP” all in double-sized:

[X] [X] 407 [#] 502 [#] 415 [#] 505 [#] 500 [#]

GROUP

All Double-sized Declaration

5.2.2 Direct Character Entry Method

■ SET Mode Keyboard Sheet

Detach the keyboard sheet frame from the register, then turn over the REG Mode Keyboard Sheet so that the

SET Mode Keyboard Sheet printed on the reverse side can be used.

123

QWE

ASD

X

84567

SPACE

Z

IRTYU

KFGHJ

MCVBN

456

123

84567

!#$

-=@

1/4

C 1/2

)%&

(

8:+/*

8456

00

45

¢£

84567

456

123

00

45

84567

90

OP

LSD

X

,.

F

ST

45 ST

DP# 2 AT/TL

4

!#$

ESC Enter

%

Up

ALL

VOID

ITEM

CORR

OPEN

#CÜ

8

47

Pg

Dw

NS

9

X45

112

00

PLU 0

6

3

DOUBLE DOUBLE

SHIFT

CAPS

LOCK

SMALL

LOCK

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-4

5.3 Condition Required for Programming Operations

■ Functions of Keys

[DOUBLE] Used to enter all the characters of one line in double-size. Depress this key before all

character entries.

[DOUBLE SHIFT] Depress this key prior to a character entry, and it will be a double-sized character. The

double-size modification using this key is effective for only one character to follow.

[CAPS LOCK] Used to enter the capital-letter mode, which is held until [SMALL LOCK] is depressed.

[SMALL LOCK] Used to enter the small-letter mode, which is held until the [CAPS LOCK] is depressed.

[SPACE] Depress this key to enter a blank instead of a character.

[←] or [ITEM CORR] Depressing this key once deletes one character just entered. Subsequent depressions

of the key will further delete the characters in the backward direction.

[ESC] Used to cancel all the characters of one line just entered before the [Enter] key

depression.

Character Keys Simply depress each key corresponding to the required character. Number Keys [1] to

[0] located on the top line of the keyboard merely function as character keys (i.e

entered numbers are part of print descriptors but not numeric value of Program No.,

Address No., Item Code, etc.).

Numeric Keys [ . ], [00], [0] to [9] (located near the bottom right of the keyboard)

These keys are used to enter codes (Program No., Address No., etc. ) . These key entries will

not be part of descriptors.

NOTE: You can enter a character not shown on the SET Mode Keyboard Sheet by the character code entry

method.

5.3 Condition Required for Programming Operations

At the top of each programming operation a “CONDITION” is given. Unless the register satisfies this condition,

the programming operations will not be allowed.

There are two types of conditions:

“Any time outside a sale”

It means that the programming operation is allowed when a sale is finalized before going into any other sale

entry.

“After ...Reset”

It means that the designated reset report must be taken before entering the programming operation. And an

error will result if the operation is attempted without taking the report. However, the words “After ... Reset” do

not necessarily mean “immediately after ...”.

When the designated reset report has already been taken and then some operations are performed in the

SET, X, or Z mode, the condition “After ... Reset” is still satisfied and the programming operation is still

allowed.

On the contrary, when the designated reset report has been taken but then some sales data relating to that

report’s output data are entered in the REG, MGR, or - mode, the programming operation will no longer be

allowed and the same reset report must be taken.

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-5

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

■ Description of each Navigation Key

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 03:04

1 PROGRAMMING

2 PROGRAM READ

3 PROGRAM DLL

Please select operation by Enter key.

0.00

TOTAL

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

13 13

14 14

15 15

••••*•••• ••••*•••• ••••*•••• ••••*••••

10 20 30 40

1

2

3

4

5

Thus the condition “After ... Reset” indicates that all the sales data relating to the report data must be zero

(except non-resettable memory data). Because of this “CONDITION” requirement, the report data will be

protected from any inconsistencies of sales data entered in the period from a resetting of the report to another

resetting of the same report next time.

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

Same as in the X or Z mode, two ways are available to access a program item; through the operator display and

through the keyboard.

5.4.1 How to Access a Program Item through the Operator Display

When you turn the mode selector key to the SET position, the initial screens shown below will appear.

Example) If you want to perform the time setting or adjustment (submode 5), operate as follows.

Display Item Description

1 Navigation Key 1 Pg up Requests the preceding program menu screen.

2 Navigation Key 2 Pg dw Requests the next program menu screen.

3 Navigation Key 3 Enter Decides a selected item. Also decides an entered numeric value or

character.

4 Navigation Key 4 ↑ Cursor Key

5 Navigation Key 5 ↓ Cursor key

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-6

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 03:04

PROGRAMMING

0 MISC 8 AMOUNT LIMIT

1 STORE NAME 9 FINANCIAL

2 CASHIER 10 PRINT L NAME

3 DEPARTMENT 11 SYSTEM OP1

4 PLU 12 CA TAX & TIP

5 TIME 13 MINOR GROUP

6 DATE 14 MAJOR

7 HOURLY 15 CUSTOMER

Please select operation by Enter key.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

→

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING TIME

01 TIME 12:34

Please input data.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

→

Select “5 TIME” from the screen using the cursor key, then depress the [ENTER] key. The screen shown below

appears.

Select “1 PROGRAMMING” from the initial screen using the cursor key, then depress the [ENTER] key. The

program menu screen shown below appears.

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING TIME

01 TIME 12:34

Please input data.

15.30

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

Enter a time value you want to set according to the guidance message “Please input data”. (In this case, 1530 for

15:30)

→

Depress the [AT/TL] key to finalize the setting and the screen automatically returns to the program menu screen.

NOTES: 1. Use the [ESC] key to return to the program menu screen after finalizing a program item “0

MISC”. Using the [AT/TL] key in this case causes an error.

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-7

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

2. When you obtain an open-price PLU in the PLU Table Setting (Submode 4), depress the [OPEN]

key before the [Enter] key depression in a step to input a PLU price.

3. If a journal printer is connected to the register, data you have just programmed will be printed on

it. No print occurs on a receipt printer, however its data will be stored in the electronic journal

buffer memory.

5.4.2 How to Access a Program Item through the Keyboard

You can directly access a program item you want to perform through a key operation on the keyboard.

■ Store Name/Message, Commercial Message, Footer Logo Message Programming (Submode 1)

CONDITION Any time outside a sale When you enter 1 and depress the [X] key,

the screen shown below will appear.

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

. . .

Repeat for another line.

1 to 4: Store Name/Message

(for Receipt/Receipt Guest Check)

5 to 7: Commercial Message (for Receipt)

8 to 9: Footer Logo Message (for Receipt)

(For sequentially programming

lines, the line number

specification can be skipped.)

max. 40 characters/line

(See 5.2 Character

Entries.)

. . .

To complete

this line

To complete the

programming and

return to the program

menu screen.

. . .

1 [X] |Line No.| [ST]

Character Entries [ST] [AT/TL]

NOTES: 1. For each line, a maximum of 40 regular-sized characters or 20 double-sized characters may be

entered. A combination of both types is also available.

2. When you fill one print line with all blanks, the line will be one line space.

3. If no commercial message is required on a receipt, fill the three print lines assigned to the

commercial message with all blanks. As a result, no extra lines will be fed.

4. As for the four print lines assigned to the store name/message, if you fill the area with all blanks,

it will be four lines space.

5. If your printer is the BRST-10 or the TM-T88, you can make and print your own logo on the store

name/message area.

6. When the program option “Footer Logo Message Print” is selected, a maximum of a 2-line footer

logo message can be programmed and it will be additionally printed on a receipt issued for a

sales transaction without an order table No. entry.

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING STORE NAME

1 STORE ↓

2 STORE

3 STORE

4 STORE

Please input item No.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-8

ex.) To program the following draft on the first line of the store name/message area.

RESTAURANT

TEC

1343 PEACH DRIVE

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

Mode Lock: SET

Enter 1, depress [X].

1 [ST] RESTAURANT [DOUBLE] [SPACE] TEC [DOUBLE] [SPACE]

1343 [SPACE] PEACH [SPACE] DRIVE [ST] [AT/TL]

Journal Print

P01

STORE NAME

#01

RESTAURANT

TEC

1343 PEACH DRIVE

0409 10:29TM

■ Cashier Programming (Submode 2)

• Programming

CONDITION Any time outside a sale When you enter 2 and depress the [X] key,

the screen shown below will appear.

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING CASHIER

Please input cashier code.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-9

For Address 2: Cashier Status

2 [ST] |Cashier Status| [#]

For Address 1: Cashier Name

1 [ST] Character Entries [ST]

(NOTE 1 below)

(max. 12 characters)

0: Cashier for Sale Entries

1: Cashier for Training Entries

2: Cashier for All Guest Order Tables

accessible (NOTE 2 below)

3: -- vacant --

4: -- vacant --

5: Server (NOTE 3 below)

...... ......

For Address 3: Tip Rate

3 [ST] |Tip Rate| [#]

0 to 99.99 (%)

(Use the [ . ] key if a decimal

portion is contained in the rate.)

(NOTE 4 below)

....

[AT/TL]

NOTES: 1. The following table shows the Cashier Codes that can be entered. (The capacity is determined by

the RAM Allocation Setting. ) However, the actual maximum number of the cashiers are

preprogrammed. Therefore, ask your TOSHIBA TEC representative for further information.

For sequentially programming the

address, the Address number

specification can be skipped.

Standard Memory Expansion Memory

Code Entry Type 1 to 15 1 to 99

[CLK] Key Type 1 to 8 ---

2. Cashier status 2 (Cashier for All Guest Order Tables accessible) is effective only when the

program option “Cashier Exclusive” is selected.

3. A cashier whose status is “server” can only take an order from a guest, but not finalize a sales

transaction.

4. The following shows the way to calculate the tip amount:

Tip Amount = (Net Sale Without Tax) x (Tip Rate)

5. For a name of each cashier, a maximum of 12 regular-sized or 6 double-sized characters can be

entered. A combination of both types is also available.

2 [X] |Cashier Code| [NS]

Repeat for

another

cashier.

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-10

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

ex.) To program the following to a cashier code 1.

Cashier Code 1: Name: JONES

Status: 5 (Server)

Tip Rate: 3%

Mode Lock: SET

Enter 2, depress [X].

1 [NS] 1 [ST] JONES [ST]

(2 [ST]) 5 [#] (3 [ST]) 3 [#] [AT/TL]

Journal Print

• Deletion

CONDITION After the Daily and GT Cashier Reset, (A cashier whose code is deleted must be in “Sign

OFF” for the code entry type. Furthermore, if the program option “Employee Management

System adopted” has been selected, the “Clock OUT” status of that cashier is necessary.)

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

Repeatable for another cashier to be deleted.

2 [X] [ITEM CORR] |Cashier Code| [NS] [AT/TL]

NOTES: 1. The Cashier Reset Report Count of the deleted cashier is cleared.

2. A cashier whose code has been deleted by this operation cannot perform a sign-ON nor a sales

transaction.

ex.) To delete the cashier code 1 “JONES”.

Journal Print

P02

CASHIER

01

#01

1CLJONES

#02 5

#03 3%

00004

0415 11:25TM

P02

CASHIER

01

1CLJONES

----------------------------------------

00003

0417 11:54TM

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-11

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING DEPARTMENT

01

DP

01

02

DP

02

03

DP

03

04

DP

04

05

DP

05

06

DP

06

07

DP

07

08

DP

08

Please input Department code.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

■ Department Table Programming (Submode 3)

• Programming

CONDITION To change the Positive/Negative When you enter 3 and depress the [X] key,

Status: the screen shown below will appear.

After Department Daily & GT

and PLU Daily & GT Reset

To change any other programmed

data or to program new departments:

Any time outside a sale

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

[ST]

Submode No.

Executes DLL.

Operation

procedure

surrounded

by this line

is the same

as the

operation in

Submode 4.

Repeat for any

address within

the same dept.

by re-entry for

correction.

(NOTE 2)

Repeat for

other

departments.

Barcode Scanning

[DP#]

3 [X] |Address Nos| [#]

(NOTE 1 on the next page.)

for sequential-coded Dept. only

(NOTE 2 on the next page.)As for details of each Address,

refer to the following pages.

Address 2: Department Name

2 [ST]

Address 1: Link Group

1 [ST]

Address 3: Status 1

3 [ST]

[ST]

Address 4: Status 2

4 [ST]

Address 5: Tax Status

5 [ST]

|Major GP| |Minor GP| [#]

(01 to 10) (01 to 30)

Character Entries [ST]

max. 16 characters

|Tax Code| [#]

|Status Code to ON| [#]

Address 6: High Amount Limit

6 [ST]

Address 7: Low Amount Limit

7 [ST]

|Low Amount to be locked out| [#]

(max. 7 digits)

|High Amount to be locked out| [#]

(max. 7 digits)

|Department Code|

Address 8: Takeout Tax Status

8 [ST]

[AT/TL] (to complete this submode)

|Takeout Tax Code| [#]

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-12

NOTES: 1. The “Address Nos” designation at the top after “3 [X]” can be skipped if not necessary. If entered,

the designated Address (es) will be automatically accessed after the department designation. For

example, if you enter |0204| [#] here (designate each address by entering a two-digit code; 01

for Address 1, 02 for Address 2, you will then enter:

Dept Code + [DP#] key,

Character Entries [ST] (“2 [ST]” can be skipped), then

Status Code for Status 2 Selection [#] (“4 [ST]” can be skipped), then you

may go on to another department setting for the same address designations.

But still in this case, you can go to other addresses by first entering the Address No. and

depressing [ST]. The Address Designation feature may be useful when you want to program or

change contents of only one or two specific Addresses of multiple departments. (For example,

when you want to change only the names, but not any other programmed contents, of 15

departments.)

2. When the Address No. is sequential from the preceding address (if the Address Designation

feature has not been used), the Address No. and the following [ST] can be omitted.

3. The programming contents of each address are further described in the DEPARTMENT TABLE

PROGRAMMING CONTENTS below.

DEPARTMENT TABLE PROGRAMMING CONTENTS

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

Major Group

Code

Minor Group

Code

-- Continued on next page --

Address No. Description of Programming Contents

1 Linked Group Code

Enter a 4-digit code, composed of a 2-digit Major Group Code and 2-digit Minor Group Code.

| | | | [#]

Minor Group Code 01 to 30

Major Group Code 01 to 10

ex.) To link Major Group No. 1 and Minor Group No. 1:

Enter: (0) 1 0 1

Enter 00 when the department is not linked to

any Minor Gruop.

Enter 0 (or 00) when the department is not linked to any Major

Group.

NOTE: The “Major Group” and “Minor Group” here are merely names for those two grouping

total memories. In the memory process, those two totals are independent from the

other and no logical check is made for a combination of the Major and Minor group

codes to be linked to each department. In other words, you may regard them as “A”

grouping and “B” grouping. See the examples on the next page:

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-13

Major-Minor Grouping Method Example:

(In this case, you should check the logical linkage between the Major Groups and Minor

Groups.)

Major GP 01 Major GP 02

Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor

GP01 GP02 GP03 GP04 GP05

DP01 DP02 DP04 DP06 DP07 DP10 DP11 DP14 DP16

0101 0101 0102 0103 0103 0204 0204 0205 0205

Linked Group Code in setting

“A” Grouping and “B” Grouping Method Example:

(In this case, you may think that each department data are processed into max. 2 different

types of groupings.)

A-GP A-GP A-GP B-GP B-GP B-GP

01 02 03 01 02 03

DP01 DP02 DP04 DP06 DP07 DP10 DP11 DP14 DP16 DP17

0100 0100 0201 0301 0300 0302 0002 0003 0003 0002

Linked Group Code in setting

2 Department Name

Enter a maximum of 16 regular-sized or 8 double-sized characters. See the section 5.2

Character Entries. End with [ST].

When no name is programmed for a department, the following will be the auto-program name

(initial setting) for printing:

D P

xx

Department Code 01 to 99

double-sized characters

Address No. Description of Programming Contents

-- Continued --

-- Continued on next page --

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-14

-- Continued --

3 Status 1 Selection

• Enter the Status Codes 1 to 3 of which status must be set to ON. More than one

code may be entered. Enter 0 when none of the statuses should be set to ON.

Status Item Selective Status

Code OFF ON

1 Receipt Type Single Double

2 Ordinary or Other Income Dept. Ordinary Other Income

3 Positive or Negative Dept. Positive Negative

NOTE: The selection of Status Code 1 (Receipt Print Type) is effective only when the

program option “Receipt Single/Double Print” has been selected.

Setting Examples:

To set only Status 2 to ON ................ Enter 2 [#]

To set Statuses 1, 2 to ON................ Enter 12 [#]

To set none of statuses to ON .......... Enter 0 [#]

4 Status 2 Selection

• Enter Status Codes 5 to 8 of which status must be set to ON. More than one

code may be entered. Enter 0 when none of the statuses should be set to ON.

Status Item Selective Status

Code OFF ON

5 Output to RKP-1? No Yes

6 Output to RKP-2? No Yes

7 Output to RKP-3? No Yes

8 Output to RKP-4? No Yes

5 Tax Status

• Enter one-to four-digit Status Codes for applicable Tax.

| | | | | [#]

Tax Status

0: Non-taxable

1: Tax 1

2: Tax 2

3: Tax 3

4: Tax 4

(More than one code can be entered for combining 1 to 4 taxable status. For

example, enter 12 to select Tax 1 and Tax 2 taxable status.)

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

Address No. Description of Programming Contents

-- Continued on next page --

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-15

-- Continued --

6 High Amount Limit

Enter a maximum of 7 digits to be set as the high amount to be locked out.

ex.) To prohibit any amount equal to or larger than $40.00:

4000 [#]

(Allows any amount equal to or smaller than $39.99.)

NOTES: 1. To cancel the preset limit (i.e. to allow any amount), enter 0.

2. The limit amount set here will be applied to entries in REG mode only, but not

in MGR or - mode.

3. Zeros must be entered as all the digits other than the highest digit.

If any other value is entered, it will be regarded as a zero.

ex.) Entering 4001 to 4999 will all result in setting 4000.

7 Low Amount Limit

Enter a maximum of 7 digits to be set as the low amount limit.

ex.) To allow any amount equal to or larger than $4.00:

400 [#]

(Allows any amount equal to or larger than $4.00.)

NOTES: 1. To cancel the preset limit (i.e. to allow any amount), enter 0.

2. The limit amount set here will be applied to entries in REG mode only, but not

in MGR or - mode.

3. Zeros must be entered as all the digits other than the highest digit.

If any other value is entered, it will be regarded as a zero.

ex.) Entering 401 to 499 will all result in setting 400.

8 Takeout Tax Status Setting

This tax status is applied to a takeout transaction when the program option “Takeout feature”

has been selected. (For an eat-in transaction, a tax status which has been programmed in

Address 5 is applied.)

• Enter one-to four-digit Status Codes for applicable Takeout Tax.

| | | | | [#]

0: Non-taxable

1: Tax 1

2: Tax 2

3: Tax 3

4: Tax 4

(More than one code can be entered for combining 1 to 4 taxable status. For

example, enter 12 to select Tax 1 and Tax 2 taxable status.)

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

Address No. Description of Programming Contents

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-16

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

NOTE: You can use a maximum of 99 departments. The memories of the departments 1 to 30 have already

been opened before delivery of the register.

If you want to open a memory and use a department other than the departments 1 to 30, enter a

department code you want to designate, then depress the [DP#] key in the key sequence of the

Department Table Programming. The memory of the department will be opened automatically.

When you only want to open a memory other than the departments 1 to 30, operate as follows.

3 [X] |Department Code| [DP#] [AT/TL]

Repeatable for another department

ex.) To program the following to a department code 1.

Department Code 1: Address 1 (Major Group/Minor Group): 03/11

Address 2 (Name): VEGETABLE

Address 3 (Status 1): 0 (no ON-status)

Address 4 (Status 2): 7 (Sales data outputted to RKP3)

Address 5 (Tax Status): 2 (Tax 2 taxable)

Address 6 (High Amount Limit): 5000 ($50.00)

Address 7 (Low Amount Limit): 100 ($1.00)

Mode Lock: SET

Enter 3, depress [X].

1 [DP#] 1 [ST] 0311 [#] (2 [ST]) VEGETABLE [ST]

(3 [ST]) 0 [#] (4 [ST]) 7 [#] (5 [ST]) 2 [#] (6 [ST]) 5000 [#] (7 [ST]) 100 [#] [AT/TL]

Journal Print

P03

DEPARTMENT

01 DP

01

#01 0311

#02 DP

01VEGETABLE

#03 0

#04 7

#05 2

#06 50.00

#07 1.00

0433 16:35TM

Repeatable for another department to be deleted.

• Deletion

CONDITION After Department Daily & GT and PLU Daily and GT Reset

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

Individual Department Deletion

3 [X] [ITEM CORR] |Department Code| [DP#] [AT/TL]

All Department Deletion

3 [X] [ITEM CORR] [ALL VOID] [AT/TL]

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-17

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

[ST]

Submode No.

Executes DLL.

Operation

procedure

surrounded

by this line

is the same

as the

operation in

Submode 4.

Repeat for any

address within

the same PLU

by re-entry for

correction.

(NOTE 3)

Repeat for

other

PLUs.

Barcode Scanning

[PLU]

4 [X] |Address Nos| [#]

(NOTE 1 on the next page.)

for sequential-coded item only

(NOTE 2 on the next page.)As for details of each Address,

refer to the following pages.

Address 2: PLU Name

2 [ST]

Address 1: Link Department

1 [ST]

Address 3: 1st Preset Price

3 [ST]

[ST]

Address 4: 2nd Preset Price

4 [ST]

Address 5: 3rd Preset Price

5 [ST]

|Department Code| [#]

(1 to 99)

Character Entries [ST]

max. 16 characters

|Price| [#]

(max. 6 digits)

|Price| [#]

(max. 6 digits)

|Price| [#]

(max. 6 digits)

|Price| [#]

(max. 6 digits)

|Price| [#]

(max. 6 digits)

|Unit Weight Table| [#]

1 to 11

Address 6: 4th Preset Price

6 [ST]

Address 7: 5th Preset Price

7 [ST]

|PLU Code|

Address 8: PLU Status 1

8 [ST]

Address 9: PLU Status 2

9 [ST]

[AT/TL] (to complete this submode)

Address 10: Tax Status

10 [ST]

|Status Code to ON| [#]

|Tare Table No.| [#]

1 to 9

|Tax Code| [#]

Address 17: Tare Table

17 [ST]

|Display Menu Table No.| [#]

(max. 10 digits)

|PLU Group Code| [#]

(1 to 99)

|Set Menu Table No.| [#]

(1 to 50)

Address 11: PLU Group

11 [ST]

Address 18: Unit Weight

18 [ST]

Address 12: Set Menu Table

12 [ST]

Address 13: Display Menu Table

13 [ST]

Address 14: Stock Quantity

14 [ST]

|Stock Quantity| [#]

(0 to 9999.99)

Address 15: Minimum Stock Quantity

15 [ST]

|Minimum Stock Quantity| [#]

(0 to 9999.99)

|Tax Code| [#]

(max. 4 digits)

Address 16: Takeout Tax Status

16 [ST]

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING PLU

Please input PLU code.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

■ PLU Table Programming (Submode 4)

This submode can be operated when new PLU items are to be added, PLU program data is to be changed, or

PLUs are to be deleted.

• Programming or Changing

CONDITION To program new PLUs or to change When you enter 4 and depress the [X] key,

any programmed contents of PLUs the screen shown below will appear.

except the following case:

Any time outside a sale

To change the linked Department

of a PLU with sales data not zero:

After PLU Reset

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-18

NOTES: 1. The “Address Nos” designation at the top after “4 [X]” can be skipped if not necessary. If entered,

the designated Address (es) will automatically be accessed after the PLU Code designation.

2. A maximum of 2500 PLUs are programmable (varies depending on the capacity and allocation of

the RAM) . The “[PLU]” key here indicates the key labeled simply as “PLU” but not any PLU

Preset-code Keys.

3. When the Address No. is sequential from the preceding address (if the Address Designation

feature has not been used), the Address No. and the following [ST] can be omitted.

PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING CONTENTS

Address No. Description of Programming Contents

1 Linked Department Code

Enter the 2-digit code of the department to which the PLU is linked. When a new PLU is

programmed, this entry is compulsory (an error will result if this entry is skipped.)

| | | [#]

2 PLU Name

Enter a maximum of 16 regular-sized or 8 double-sized characters. See the section 5.2

Character Entries. End with [ST].

When no name is programmed for a PLU, the following will be the auto-program name for

printing:

PLUxxxxxx

PLU Code

3 1st Preset Price

• For a preset PLU (preset-price PLU), enter a maximum of 6-digit price, and depress [#].

1 to 999999 (result: $0.01 to $9999.99)

• A zero-price ($0.00) may be preset by entering 0 in the above operation.

• When no numerics are entered and the [#] key is simply depressed, the PLU will be an

open PLU (open-price PLU).

4 2nd Preset Price

• For a preset PLU (preset-price PLU), enter a maximum of 6-digit price, and depress [#].

1 to 999999 (result: $0.01 to $9999.99)

• A zero-price ($0.00) may be preset by entering 0 in the above operation.

• When no numerics are entered and the [#] key is simply depressed, the PLU will be an

open PLU (open-price PLU).

• If this address entry is skipped, the 1st preset price will be automatically programmed as

the 2nd preset price.

5 3rd Preset Price

• For a preset PLU (preset-price PLU), enter a maximum of 6-digit price, and depress [#].

1 to 999999 (result: $0.01 to $9999.99)

• A zero-price ($0.00) may be preset by entering 0 in the above operation.

• When no numerics are entered and the [#] key is simply depressed, the PLU will be an

open PLU (open-price PLU).

• If this address entry is skipped, the 1st preset price will be automatically programmed as

the 3rd preset price.

6 4th Preset Price

• For a preset PLU (preset-price PLU), enter a maximum of 6-digit price, and depress [#].

1 to 999999 (result: $0.01 to $9999.99)

• A zero-price ($0.00) may be preset by entering 0 in the above operation.

• When no numerics are entered and the [#] key is simply depressed, the PLU will be an

open PLU (open-price PLU).

• If this address entry is skipped, the 1st preset price will be automatically programmed as

the 4th preset price.

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

1 to 99

-- Continued on next page --

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-19

7 5th Preset Price

• For a preset PLU (preset-price PLU), enter a maximum of 6-digit price, and depress [#].

1 to 999999 (result: $0.01 to $9999.99)

• A zero-price ($0.00) may be preset by entering 0 in the above operation.

• When no numerics are entered and the [#] key is simply depressed, the PLU will be an

open PLU (open-price PLU).

• If this address entry is skipped, the 1st preset price will be automatically programmed as

the 5th preset price.

8 Status 1 Selection

• Enter the Status Codes 1 to 7 of which status must be set to ON. More than one code

may be entered. Enter 0 when none of the statuses should be set to ON.

Status Item Selective Status

Code OFF ON

1 Stock Process Non-stock Stock

2 Net to S.I. 1? No Yes

3 Net to S.I. 2? No Yes

4 -- vacant --

5 Modifier Entry for this PLU Prohibited Allowed

6 This PLU is used as: Menu item Modifier item

7 Lock or Unlock? Unlock (in use) Lock (not in use)

Setting Examples:

To set only Status 2 to ON ................ Enter 2 [#]

To set Statuses 2, 3, 7 to ON............ Enter 237 [#]

To set none of statuses to ON .......... Enter 0 [#]

9 Status 2 Selection

• Enter the Status Codes 1 to 5 of which status must be set to ON. More than one code

may be entered. Enter 0 when none of the statuses should be set to ON.

Status Item Selective Status

Code OFF ON

1 Scale Entry Prohibited Compulsory

2 Manual Tare Entry Optional Compulsory

3 Canada Tax Symbol Print Non-print Print (A symbol “F”)

(NOTE below)

4 Combo Exemption Flag No Exemption

5 Using the [CODE SHIFT] Possible Not possible

key for this PLU

NOTES: 1. Canada tax symbol is assigned as follows.

“T” for the PST, “F” for the GST

2. Status Code 1 (Scale Entry) and Status Code 1 (Stock Process) of the

preceding address cannot be combined with one PLU.

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

Address No. Description of Programming Contents

-- Continued --

-- Continued on next page --

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-20

10 Tax Status

• Enter one-to four-digit Status Codes for applicable Tax.

| | | | | [#]

0: Non-taxable

1: Tax 1 (Tax 1 taxable)

2: Tax 2

3: Tax 3

4: Tax 4

(More than one code can be entered for combining Tax 1 to Tax 4 taxable status. For

example, enter 12 to select Tax 1 and Tax 2 taxable status.)

NOTE: When a tax status has not been programmed to a PLU in this address, the tax status

of the PLU is determined by that of a linked department.

11 PLU Group No. (for purposes of reports)

• Enter a 2-digit code (1 to 99) as a PLU Group No. to which the PLU belongs, and

depress [#]. To cancel the Group No. once set, enter 0 and depress [#].

12 Set Menu Table No.

| | | [#]

Enter the Set Menu Table No. (1 to 50), and depress [#]. The sub menu PLUs which link to

each table will be set later in a separate operation (Submode 42).

13 Display Menu Table

• Enter a Display Menu Table No. which is programmed in the Submode 53 (Display Menu

Table Setting), then depress the [#] key. A maximum of 5 display menu table Nos. (max.

10 digit-value) can be entered. Enter 0, then depress the [#] key to cancel the display

menu table.

NOTE: When you enter the display menu tables of which Nos. are 1 to 9, add 0 before the

number.

ex.) When you want to program the display menu tables 1 and 2, enter 0102, then

depress the [#] key.

14 Stock Quantity (applicable when Status Code 1 has been entered in Address 8)

• Enter the stock quantity of the PLU in max. 6 digits (0 to 9999.99). Use the [ . ] key if any

decimal portion is contained.

| | | | | [ . ] | | | [#]

The entered quantity will replace the existing stock quantity value, if any.

15 Minimum Stock Quantity (applicable when Status Code 1 of Address 8 has been set to ON

and the Stock Quantity of Address 14 has been entered.)

• Enter the minimum stock quantity of the PLU in max. 6 digits (0 to 9999.99; use the [ . ]

key if any decimal portion is contained.)

| | | | | [ . ] | | | [#]

By setting a Minimum Stock Quantity value here, a short tone for warning will be generated

on entering a sale entry of this PLU to turn the stock quantity less than the preset minimum

stock quantity value.

-- Continued --

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

Address No. Description of Programming Contents

1 to 50

-- Continued on next page --

0 to 9999.99

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-21

16 Takeout Tax Status Setting

This tax status is applied to a takeout transaction when the program option “Takeout feature”

has been selected. (For an eat-in transaction, a tax status which has been programmed in

Address 10 is applied.)

• Enter one-to four-digit Status Codes for applicable Takeout Tax.

| | | | | [#]

0: Non-taxable

1: Tax 1

2: Tax 2

3: Tax 3

4: Tax 4

(More than one code can be entered for combining 1 to 4 taxable status. For

example, enter 12 to select Tax 1 and Tax 2 taxable status.)

NOTE: When a tax status has not been programmed to a PLU in this address, the tax status

of the PLU is determined by that of a linked department.

17 Tare Table No. (for Scale-compulsory PLUs only)

| | [#]

Enter the Tare Table No. (1 to 9). The content of each Tare Table is set later in a separate

operation (Submode 26). In a scale item entry of a PLU with a Tare Table No. set, the tare

weight preset in the Tare Table will automatically be subtracted from the total weight read

from the scale. Enter 0 to cancel a Tare Table No. once set. Or skip this address setting for

PLUs not needing any tare weight calculations.

18 Individual PLU Unit Weight Table Code (for Scale-compulsory PLUs only)

| | | [#]

LB unit Kg unit

0:

General Unit Weight (set in Submode 26)

1: 1 LB 1 Kg

2: 2 LB 2 Kg

3: 3 LB 3 Kg

4: 4 LB 4 Kg

5: 5 LB 5 Kg

6: 6 LB 6 Kg

7: 7 LB 7 Kg

8: 8 LB 8 Kg

9: 9 LB 9 Kg

10: 1/2 LB 100 g

11: 1/4 LB

not applicable

NOTE: Whether the ECR adopts the LB or Kg unit system is determined by a program option

selection.

-- Continued --

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

Address No. Description of Programming Contents

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-22

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

ADDITIONAL NOTES

If a PLU is linked to an Other Income Department, the PLU is automatically set as Other Income PLU.

If a PLU is linked to a negative Department, the PLU is automatically set as negative PLU.

Amount Limits (High Amount, Low Amount) of each open-price PLU will be determined by those of its link

department.

Receipt type (Itemized receipt or Single/Double receipt) of each PLU will be determined by those of its link

department.

Whether or not each PLU data is output to the Remote Kitchen Printers will be determined by the status of its link

department.

ex.) To program the following to a PLU code 20.

PLU Code 20: Address 1 (Link Department): 2

Address 2 (Name): CHEESE BURGER

Address 3 (1st Price): $2.00

Address 4 (2nd Price): $1.80

Address 8 (Status 1): 5 (Condiment Entry Allowed)

Address 10 (Tax Status): 12 (Tax 1 & 2 taxable)

Address 11 (PLU Group): 3

Address 12 (Set Menu Table No.): 1

Address 13 (Display Menu Table No.): 03 (Table 3)

Address 16 (Takeout Tax Status): 1 (Tax 1 taxable)

Mode Lock: SET

Enter 4, depress [X].

20 [PLU] 1 [ST] 2 [#] (2 [ST]) CHEESE BURGER [ST]

(3 [ST]) 200 [#] (4 [ST]) 180 [#] 8 [ST] 5 [#] 10 [ST] 12 [#] (11 [ST]) 3 [#] (12 [ST]) 1 [#]

(13 [ST]) 03 [#] 16 [ST] 1 [#] [AT/TL]

Journal Print

P04

PLU

000020

PLU000020

#01 02

#02

CHEESE BURGER

#03 2.00@

#04 1.80@

#08 5

#10 12

#11 03

#12 01

#13 03

#16 1

00013

0003 10:17TM

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-23

ex.) To delete PLU Code 120001 that was once programmed: Journal Print

Mode Lock: SET

Enter 4, depress [X].

[ITEM CORR] 120001 [PLU]

[AT/TL]

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

Repeatable for other PLUs to be deleted.

• Deletion

CONDITION To delete a PLU with sales data of zero: Any time outside a sale

To delete a PLU with sales data of not zero: After PLU Reset

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

Individual PLU Deletion

4 [X] [ITEM CORR] |PLU Code| [PLU] [AT/TL]

P04

PLU

120001

PLU120001

----------------------------------------

00013

0006 10:24TM

All PLU Deletion

4 [X] [ITEM CORR] [ALL VOID] [AT/TL]

• PLU Programmed Data Copying

This operation is used to copy the programmed data of a PLU item and to use it in programming another PLU

item, thus eliminating time in PLU programming operation.

CONDITION To program new PLUs or to change any programmed contents of PLUs:

Any time outside a sale (except the following case)

To change the PLU of the copy-destination with sales data not zero:

After PLU Reset

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

4 [X] |PLU Code of the copy-destination| [PLU] [NS]

|PLU Code of the copy-source| [PLU]

The programmed data of the copy-source PLU is now copied to the copy-destination PLU

(except the PLU Code). Then follow the procedure on the page of Programming or

Changing to change data of any required Addresses.

ex.) To program the PLU Code 22 (BIG CHEESE BURGER) by copying the programmed data of the PLU Code

20 (CHEESE BURGER).

Mode Lock: SET, enter 4, depress [X]

22 [PLU] (PLU Code of the copy-destination)

[NS]

20 [PLU] (PLU Code of the copy-source)

2 [ST] BIG CHEESEBURGER [ST] (Address 2, Name changed into: BIG CHEESEBURGER)

(3 [ST]) 300 [#] (Address 3, the 1st price changed into: $3.00)

(4 [ST]) 250 [#] (Address 4, the 2nd price changed into: $2.50)

[AT/TL]

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-24

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

Journal Print

P04

PLU

000022

CHEESE BURGER

#00 000020

#02

BIG CHEESEBURGER

#03 3.00@

#04 2.50@

00002

0011 10:58TM

■ Time Setting or Adjustment (Submode 5)

CONDITION Any time outside a sale When you enter 5 and depress the [X] key,

the screen shown below will appear.

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

(0 to 23) (00 to 59)

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING TIME

01 TIME 12:34

Please input data.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

5 [X] |Hour| |Minute| [AT/TL]

ex.) To set the time to “1:35 p.m. (13:35)”:

Mode Lock to SET, enter 5, depress [X].

Enter 1335, depress [AT/TL].

Journal Print

NOTE: If an hour value of more than 23 or a minute value of more than 59 is entered, it will result in an error.

The current date will not be changed by setting or adjusting the time.

P05

TIME

13:35TM

0012 13:35TM

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-25

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING DATE

01 DATE THURSDAY 02-11-1999

Please input data.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

■ Date Setting or Adjustment (Submode 6)

CONDITION Any time outside a sale When you enter 6 and depress the [X] key,

the screen shown below will appear.

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

(01 to 12) (01 to 31) (1999, etc.)

0: SUN (Sunday)

1: MON (Monday)

2: TUE (Tuesday)

3: WED (Wednesday)

4: THU (Thursday)

5: FRI (Friday)

6: SAT (Saturday)

ex.) To set the date to Tuesday, 21st of December, 1999:

Mode Lock: SET, enter 6, depress [X]

Enter 212211999, depress [AT/TL]

Journal Print

NOTES: 1. A program option allows you to select the date order as follows.

• Month-Day-Year (Initial Date Order)

• Day-Month-Year

• Year-Month-Day

2. The Day-of-week is programmable not to be printed on receipts.

P06

DATE

TUESDAY

12-21-1999

0014 13:37TM

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-26

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING HOURLY ↓

01 00:00

02 00:00

03 00:00

04 00:00

05 00:00

06 00:00

07 00:00

08 00:00

Please input item No.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

■ Hourly Range Setting (Submode 7)

A maximum of 48 hourly ranges can be set. You can obtain sales data by each hourly range, also you can

designate a price level and a menu level for each day of the week.

CONDITION After Hourly Range Reset and When you enter 7 and depress the [X] key,

Combo Sale Hourly Range Reset the screen shown below will appear.

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

Address 1: Start Time

1 [ST]

Submode No.

7 [X]

Address 2: Price Level and Menu

Level for Sunday

2 [ST]

|Hourly Range| [NS]

1 to 48

|Hour| |Minute| [#]

0 to 23 00 to 59

|Menu Level| |Price Level| [#]

1 to 5 1 to 5

[AT/TL]

|Menu Level| |Price Level| [#]

1 to 5 1 to 5

|Menu Level| |Price Level| [#]

1 to 5 1 to 5

|Menu Level| |Price Level| [#]

1 to 5 1 to 5

|Menu Level| |Price Level| [#]

1 to 5 1 to 5

|Menu Level| |Price Level| [#]

1 to 5 1 to 5

|Menu Level| |Price Level| [#]

1 to 5 1 to 5

Address 3: Price Level and Menu

Level for Monday

3 [ST]

Address 4: Price Level and Menu

Level for Tuesday

4 [ST]

Address 5: Price Level and Menu

Level for Wednesday

5 [ST]

Address 6: Price Level and Menu

Level for Thursday

6 [ST]

Address 7: Price Level and Menu

Level for Friday

7 [ST]

Address 8: Price Level and Menu

Level for Saturday

8 [ST]

Repeat until all the hourly ranges you want to set are entered. (max. 48 hourly ranges)

NOTES: 1. When you enter only a 1-digit code (1 to 5) for a price & menu level portion, the price level of

which code is entered will be designated.

2. Do not set an hourly range across 24:00, such as “from 23:00 to 1:00”. If set, no data will be

processed into that hourly range.

3. To reset the hourly range table once set, operate as follows.

7 [X] 0 [#] [AT/TL]

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-27

ex.) To set the following to a hourly range 1.

Hourly Range 1: Address 1 (Start Time): 1000 (10:00)

Address 2 (Sunday): 55 (Menu Level 5/Price Level 5)

Address 3 (Monday): 11 (Menu Level 1/Price Level 1)

Address 4 (Tuesday): 12 (Menu Level 1/Price Level 2)

Address 5 (Wednesday): 13 (Menu Level 1/Price Level 3)

Address 6 (Thursday): 23 (Menu Level 2/Price Level 3)

Address 7 (Friday): 34 (Menu Level 3/Price Level 4)

Address 8 (Saturday): 45 (Menu Level 4/Price Level 5)

Mode Lock: SET

Enter 7, depress [X].

1 [NS] 1 [ST] 1000 [#] (2 [ST]) 55 [#] (3 [ST]) 11 [#] (4 [ST]) 12 [#] (5 [ST]) 13 [#] (6 [ST]) 23 [#]

(7 [ST]) 34 [#] (8 [ST]) 45 [#] [AT/TL]

Journal Print

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

P07

HOURLY

01#00 10:00TM

#01 10:00TM

#02 55

#03 11

#04 12

#05 13

#06 23

#07 34

#08 45

0069 19:06TM

■ Amount Limit Setting for Function Keys (Submode 8)

This programming is used to set a high or low amount limit for the items shown in the following list.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale When you enter 8 and depress the [X] key,

the screen shown below will appear.

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING AMOUNT LIMIT ↓

01 AT/TL 0.00

02 CHK 0.00

03 Chg 0.00

04 MISC 0.00

05 CPN 0.00

06 CREDIT1 0.00

07 CREDIT2 0.00

08 CREDIT3 0.00

Please input item No.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

8 [X] |Key Code| [ST] |Amount Limit| [#] [AT/TL]

(See the list on

the next page.)

Max. 8 digits; 0 to reset

(Max. 7 digits for Key Codes 11 and 12)

Repeat for another key item.

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-28

ex.) To set a tender limit amount $100.00 on the [CHECK] key Journal Print

Mode Lock: SET

Enter 8, depress [X].

2 [ST] 10000 [#] [AT/TL]

Key Item or Key to be applied

Code

1 [AT/TL] (Cash Tender)

2 [CHECK] (Check Tender)

3 [Chg] (Charge Tender)

4 [MISC] (Misc. Tender)

5 [CPN] (Media-Coupon Tender)

6 [CREDIT 1] (Credit 1 Tender)

7 [CREDIT 2] (Credit 2 Tender)

8 [CREDIT 3] (Credit 3 Tender)

9 [CREDIT 4] (Credit 4 Tender)

10 [CREDIT 5] (Credit 5 Tender)

11 High Amount Limit common to all depts.

12 Low Amount Limit common to all depts.

13 Charge Posting Limit Amount

common to all customers

Key Item or Key to be applied

Code

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

P08

AMOUNT LIMIT

#02

CHECK

100.00

0022 18:04TM

NOTES: 1. If the individual High or Low Amount Limit of a department has been set, it prevails over the

Common High or Low Limit for all departments here.

2. The Amount Limit Set Value of each tender media is the high amount limit and is effective only

when the media key is used for tendering but not when used as total key.

■ Non-taxable Amount Limit Setting (for Canada)/Gratuity Rate Setting (Submode 12)

This programming is used to set a non-taxable amount limit applied to Ontario, Canada. It is also used to set a

gratuity rate.

CONDITION After Daily Financial Reset When you enter 12 and depress the [X] key,

the screen shown below will appear.

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

Max. 4 digits

(1 to 9999; 0 to reset)

2 [ST] |Gratuity Rate| [#] [AT/TL]

0.001 to 99.999%; use the [ . ] key

if a decimal portion is contained.

12 [X] 1 [ST] |Non-taxable Limit Amount| [#]

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING CA TAX & TIP

01 CANADA TAX 0.00

02 GRATUITY 0%

Please input data.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

*

* When a gratuity rate only is programmed

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-29

P12

CA TAX & TIP

CANADA TAX

20.00

GRATUITY

5%

0028 20:10TM

■ Minor Group Name Programming (Submode 13)

This programming is used to set each minor group name. Association among a department, a minor group

and a major group should be set in the Department Table Programming (Submode 3).

CONDITION Any time outside a sale When you enter 13 and depress the [X] key,

the screen shown below will appear.

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

(1 to 30)

ex.) To set “GREENSTUFF” for a minor group1

Mode Lock: SET

Enter 13, depress [X].

1 [ST] GREENSTUFF [ST] [AT/TL]

Journal Print

*

(See NOTE)

Repeat for other groups * (For sequentially programming Group Codes

(max. 30 groups) and Names, the code specification can be skipped.)

P13

MINOR GROUP

01

GREENSTUFF

0029 20:29TM

13 [X] |Minor Group Code| [ST] Character Entries [ST] [AT/TL]

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING MINOR GROUP ↓

01

GP

01

02

GP

02

03

GP

03

04

GP

04

05

GP

05

06

GP

06

07

GP

07

08

GP

08

Please input item No.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

ex.) To set the following Journal Print

• Non-taxable Amount Limit: $20.00

• Gratuity Rate: 5%

Mode Lock: SET

Enter 12, depress [X].

1 [ST] 2000 [#] (2 [ST]) 5 [#] [AT/TL]

NOTE: A maximum of 12 regular-sized characters may be set for each Minor Group name. One double-sized

character occupies two regular-sized character’s space. Also see the CHARACTER ENTRIES at the

beginning of this chapter. If no name is programmed for a Minor Gruop, an auto-preset data is assigned

as the Minor Group Name (GPxx; xx = Minor Group Code 01 to 30).

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-30

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

(1 to 10)

*

(See NOTE)

Repeat for other groups * (For sequentially programming Group Codes

(max. 10 groups) and Names, the code specification can be skipped.)

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING MAJOR ↓

01

MGP

01

02

MGP

02

03

MGP

03

04

MGP

04

05

MGP

05

06

MGP

06

07

MGP

07

08

MGP

08

Please input item No.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

14 [X] |Major Group Code| [ST] Character Entries [ST] [AT/TL]

ex.) To set “OTHER” for a major group10

Mode Lock: SET

Enter 14, depress [X].

10 [ST] OTHER [ST] [AT/TL]

Journal Print

■ Major Group Name Programming (Submode 14)

This programming is used to set each major group name. Association among a department, a minor group

and a major group should be set in the Department Table Programming (Submode 3).

CONDITION Any time outside a sale When you enter 14 and depress the [X] key,

the screen shown below will appear.

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

P14

MAJOR

10

OTHER

0030 20:48TM

NOTE: A maximum of 12 regular-sized characters may be set for each Major Group name. One double-sized

character occupies two regular-sized character’s space. Also see the CHARACTER ENTRIES at the

beginning of this chapter. If no name is programmed for a Major Group, an auto-preset data is assigned

as the Major Group Name (MGPxx; xx = Major Group Code 01 to 10).

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-31

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING CUSTOMER

Please input customer code.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

■ Customer File Table Setting (Submode 15)

This programming is used to set a customer file table(customer code, customer name, limit amount and price

level), which is used for the charge posting transaction.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale When you enter 15 and depress the [X] key,

the screen shown below will appear.

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

Address 1: Customer Name

1 [ST]

Submode No.

15 [X]

|Customer File Code| [NS]

Max. 12 digits

Character Entries [ST]

Max. 16 characters

Address 2:

Charge Posting Limit

Amount for each

Customer

2 [ST]

|Charge Posting Limit Amount| [#]

Max. 8 digits

[AT/TL]

Address 3: Price Level for each

Customer

3 [ST]

|Price Level| [#]

1 to 5

Repeat for another Customer file.

Customer Card Reading through the MCR

ex.) To program the following to a customer file code 5.

Customer File Code 5: Address 1 (Customer Name): SHEARER

Address 2 (Limit Amount): $500.00

Address 3 (Price Level): 2

Mode Lock: SET

Enter 15, depress [X].

5 [NS] 1 [ST] SHEARER [ST] (2 [ST]) 50000 [#] (3 [ST]) 2 [#] [AT/TL]

Journal Print

P15

CUSTOMER

000000000005

#01

SHEARER

#02 500.00

#03 2

00006

0034 12:56TM

NOTES: 1. A maximum of 5000 customer file tables can be used.

2. When a charge posting limit amount is set for each customer in this programming, it prevails over

the common limit amount programmed in the Submode 8.

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-32

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING COMBI REPORT

01 1103000000

02 0000000000

03 0000000000

Please input item No.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

■ Combination Report Table Programming (Submode 19)

This programming is used to make a combination report table which is described in the section 4.3

Combination Reports on page 4-9.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale When you enter 19 and depress the [X] key,

the screen shown below will appear.

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

19 [X] |Table No.| [ST] |Report Code| [#] [ST] [AT/TL]

1 to 3

*

3 to 48 (See the Report

Code Table below), or 0

to delete the table.

. . .

Repeatable for max. five different reports

combination.

Repeat for other tables. * (For sequentially programming Tables, the

Table No. specification can be skipped.)

Report Code Table

Report Report Name Mode for output

Code

3 Financial ****

4 All Cashier ****

6 Credit Card Company Sales ****

8 Department Group * *

9 Each Media Sales and In-drawer Total *

10 Hourly Range * *

11 All Department ****

12 All Media Sales and Cash-in-drawer *

13 All PLU Sales ****

14 All PLU Stock *

15 All Customer File * *

24 PLU Group ****

X Z GTX GTZ

*: output

Blank: no output

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-33

Report Code Table

Report Report Name Mode for output

Code

X Z GTX GTZ

P19

COMBI REPORT

#01 0304470000

0035 13:38TM

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

*: output

Blank: no output

ex.) To program the following reports to a combination report table 1.

• 3: Financial

• 4: All Cashier

• 47 Employee Clock-in/Clock-out

Mode Lock: SET

Enter 19, depress [X].

1 [ST] 3 [#] 4 [#] 47 [#] [ST] [AT/TL]

Journal Print

NOTES: 1. When changes are made on report combination in a table, entirely or partially, program all the

reports in that table again.

2. An error will result if a Report Code that has already been entered is attempted to enter again in

the same table.

3. In Table No.1, auto-preset report combination of Report 11 (All Depts) and Report 3 (Financial) is

programmed. It will be active as Table No.1 content unless no data are programmed for Table

No.1.

25 Day Part * *

30 Check Track with Sales * *

31 Check Track without Sales *

43 Combo Sales * *

44 Hourly Combo Sales * *

47 Employee Clock-in/Clock-out * * * *

48 Employee Clock-in/Clock-out (periodic) * *

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-34

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING STOCK

000001 PLU000001 580

Please input PLU code.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

■ PLU Stock Loading or Changing (Submode 24)

This submode loads or changes the stock quantities of PLUs with the Stock-process status, as part of stock

controls. The stock of a PLU may be entered initially in the PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING operation

(Submode 4), and may be adjusted in this operation, from day to day, as the stock increases due to delivery

from wholesalers, etc. or as the stock decreases due to damages or losses.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale When you enter 24 and depress the [X] key,

the screen shown below will appear.

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

24 [X] |PLU Code| [PLU] |Adding Quantity| [STOCK] [AT/TL]

[VOID] Subtracting|

Quantity |

0 to 9999.99

*

* (Repeatable for

the PLU of the

next sequential

code)

Repeat for other PLUs for stock change.

0 to 9999.99

ex.) To subtract 150 from 580 of a current stock quantity of a PLU 1.

Mode Lock: SET

Enter 24, depress [X].

1 [PLU] [VOID] 150 [STOCK] [AT/TL]

Journal Print

P24

STOCK

000001

PLU000001

-150

430

0038 14:07TM

NOTES: 1. When you enter 24 and depress the [X] key, a current stock quantity of each PLU will be

displayed.

2. The total stock quantity of a PLU after the addition or subtraction must not exceed the value

range from 0 through 9999.99. Otherwise, the Adding or Subtracting Quantity entry will result in

an error. Use the [ . ] key if decimal portion is contained.

3. The PLU Code here must exist in the PLU Table file and the PLU must be set with Stock-process

status.

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-35

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING TARE SCALE ↓

01 0.001b

02 0.001b

03 0.001b

04 0.001b

05 0.001b

06 0.001b

07 0.001b

08 0.001b

Please input item No.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

■ Tare Table and General Unit Weight Setting (Submode 26)

In the PLU Table Programming operation (Submode 4), some of Scale-compulsory PLUs may be set with a

Tare Table No. The actual tare weight is set to each Tare Table here. Also, the General Unit Weight is set

here so that the Unit Weight may be effective to scale items entered through departments or PLUs without any

Individual Unit Weight designation.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale When you enter 26 and depress the [X] key,

the screen shown below will appear.

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

26 [X] |Tare Table No.| [ST] |Tare Weight| [#]

1 to 9

*

0 to 999 (Unit: 1/100

LB or gram. Example:

enter 13 for 0.13 LB.)

. . .

Repeat for other tables. * (For sequentially programming tables, the

Table No. specification can be skipped.)

LB Unit Kg Unit

1: 1 LB 1 Kg

2 2 LB 2 Kg

3 3 LB 3 Kg

4 4 LB 4 Kg

5 5 LB 5 Kg

6 6 LB 6 Kg

7 7 LB 7 Kg

8 8 LB 8 Kg

9 9 LB 9 Kg

10 1/2 LB 100 g

11 1/4 LB Not applicable

10 [ST]

|General Unit Weight Code| [#] [AT/TL]

Only to set

the General

Unit Weight

**

1 to 11

** Only to set the

Tare Weight

ex.) To set the following. Journal Print

• Tare Table No. 1 with Tare Weight 0.13 LB

• General Weight 2 LB (Code 2).

Mode Lock: SET

Enter 26, depress [X].

1 [ST] 13 [#] 10 [ST] 2 [#] [AT/TL]

P26

TARE SCALE

#01 0.131b

#10 21b

0042 15:26TM

NOTE: The initial value for the General Unit Weight is set to Code 1 (1LB or 1Kg).

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-36

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING PLU KEY S1

01

02

03

04

05

Please input item No.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

■ PLU Preset-code Key/Display Key Setting (Submode 27)

This programming is used to assign a PLU code to each PLU Preset-code key (SFKC 96), and also used to

assign a display menu table No. to each display key (SFKC 210). You can assign a maximum of 5 different

PLU codes or 5 different display menu table Nos. to one key of the keyboard.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale When you enter 27 and depress the [X] key,

the screen shown below will appear.

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

27 [X] |Keyboard No.| [ST] |PLU Code or Display Menu Table No.| [KEY] [AT/TL]

Max. 6 digits for PLU Code

1 to 99 for Display Menu Table No.

(Enter 0 to close a key)

1: ECR Keyboard 1

2: ECR Keyboard 2

3: ECR Keyboard 3

4: ECR Keyboard 4

5: ECR Keyboard 5

Depress

the

required

key on

the ECR

Keyboard.

ex.) To assign the PLU code 9 to the required key on the ECR Keyboard 2 and the display menu table No. 2

to the required key on the ECR Keyboard 5.

Mode Lock: SET

Enter 27, depress [X].

2 [ST] 9 [required key of SFKC 96] 5 [ST] 2 [required key of SFKC 210] [AT/TL]

Journal Print

Repeat for other Keys.

P27

PLU KEY

2

PLU

#103 000009

5

DISPLAY

#075 02

0046 16:21TM

Keyboard Phase No.

Location Code (left); refer to REMARK on the next page.

PLU Code assigned to a key (right)

NOTES: 1. When an entry of PLU code or display menu table No. is skipped and a [KEY] is simply

depressed in the above key operation, the preprogrammed PLU code or display menu table No.

of the KEY will be displayed.

2. If “0” is entered as PLU Code or display menu table No. in the above sequence, the KEY will be

closed. Pressing the closed KEY in sale entry will be ignored.

3. The five phases of the keyboard can be shifted by the [MENU] keys in actual sales transaction.

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-37

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

11631

21732

31833

34

10646 61 76 91

419

10747 62 77 92

10848 63 78 93

10949 64 79 94

14 29 44

15 30 45

11959 74 89 104

12060 75 90 105

52035

62136

37

722

11050 65 80 95

11151 66 81 96

11252 67 82 97

82338

92439

40

10 25

11353 68 83 98

11454 69 84 99

11555 70 85 100

11 26 41

12 27 42

43

13 28

11656 71 86 101

11757 72 87 102

11858 73 88 103

166121 136 151

167122 137 152

168123 138 153

169124 139 154

179134 149 164

180135 150 165

170125 140 155

171126 141 156

172127 142 157

173128 143 158

174129 144 159

175130 145 160

176131 146 161

177132 147 162

178133 148 163

Navigation Key

181

Navigation Key 1

182

Navigation Key 2

183

Navigation Key 3

184

Navigation Key 4

185

Navigation Key 5

REMARK: When a PLU code (display menu No.) is assigned to a PLU Preset-code Key (Display Key) on the

ECR Keyboard in the operation on the preceding page, the Hardware Key Code which indicates the

absolute location of the key will be printed to the left of the assigned PLU Code (display menu No.).

The Hardware Key Codes of the ECR keyboard are shown below.

ECR Keyboard

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-38

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

(1 to 99)

*

(See NOTE)

Repeat for other groups * (For sequentially programming Group Codes

(max. 99 groups) and Names, the code specification can be skipped.)

ex.) To set “BEER” for a PLU group 2

Mode Lock: SET

Enter 29, depress [X].

2 [ST] BEER [ST] [AT/TL]

Journal Print

29 [X] |PLU Group Code| [ST] Character Entries [ST] [AT/TL]

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING PLU GROUP ↓

01 PLU GP01

02 PLU GP02

03 PLU GP03

04 PLU GP04

05 PLU GP05

06 PLU GP06

07 PLU GP07

08 PLU GP08

Please input item No.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

■ PLU Group Name Programming (Submode 29)

This programming is used to set each PLU group name. Grouping of each PLU should be set in the PLU

Table Programming (Submode 4).

CONDITION Any time outside a sale When you enter 29 and depress the [X] key,

the screen shown below will appear.

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

P29

PLU GROUP

02

BEER

0050 16:52TM

NOTE: A maximum of 16 regular-sized characters may be set for each PLU Group name. One double-sized

character occupies two regular-sized characters’ space. Also see the CHARACTER ENTRIES at the

beginning of this chapter. If no name is programmed for a PLU Group, an auto-preset data is assigned

as the PLU Group Name (PLU GPxx; xx = PLU Group Code 01 to 99).

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-39

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING RKP MESSAGE ↓

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

Please input item No.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

■ RKP Message Programming (Submode 30)

This programming is used to set 20 RKP messages (a maximum of 20 characters x 2 lines for each), and also

used to designate an RKP on which each message is outputted. If your printer is the TM-300, you can select a

color for each message.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale When you enter 30 and depress the [X] key,

the screen shown below will appear.

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

Address 1: Guest Name

1 [ST]

Submode No.

30 [X]

|Message No.| [NS]

1 to 20

|1st Line Message Entries| [ST]

Max. 20 characters

Initial Setting: Blank for all characters

[AT/TL]

Repeat for another message.

Guest Card Reading through the MCR

Address 1: Guest Name

2 [ST]

|2nd Line Message Entries| [ST]

Max. 20 characters

Initial Setting: Blank for all characters

Address 1: Guest Name

3 [ST]

|RKP No. of the destination| [#]

Max. 4 digits: Multiple RKPs are selectable.

(NOTE 2 below) Initial Setting: RKP No. 1

Address 1: Guest Name

4 [ST]

|Color| [#]

0: Black (Initial Setting)

1: Red

ex.) To set the following to the RKP message 1. Journal Print

• 1st Line: 20 RKP MESSAGES ARE

• 2nd Line: PROGRAMMABLE!

• Destination: 13 (RKP Nos. 1 and 3)

Mode Lock: SET

Enter 30, depress [X].

1 [NS] 1 [ST] 20 [SPACE] RKP [SPACE]

MESSAGES [SPACE] ARE [SPACE] [ST]

(2 [ST]) PROGRAMMABLE! [ST] (3 [ST])

13 [#] [AT/TL]

NOTES: 1. When you fill one whole line with all blanks, it will result in a one line space.

2. When you want to designate the RKP Nos. 1 and 3 as the destinations, enter 13, then depress

the [#] key.

P30

RKP MESSAGE

01

#01

20 RKP MESSAGES ARE

#02

PROGRAMMABLE!

#03 13

0051 17:01TM

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-40

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING DISPLAY MSG

01

02

03

04

Please input item No.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

31 [X] |Message Line No.| [ST] Character Entries [ST] [AT/TL]

(1 to 4; max. 4 lines)

*

(Max. 16 characters per

line. Regular-size only.)

Repeat for other lines. * Allowed for sequential Line No. only

ex.) To set a message “WE SERVE THE CHOICEST FOOD. PLEASE ENJOY YOUR DINNER.”

Mode Lock: SET

Enter 35, depress [X].

1 [ST] WE [SPACE] SERVE [SPACE] THE [SPACE] CHO [ST]

(2 [ST]) ICEST [SPACE] FOOD. [ST] (3 [ST]) PLEASE [SPACE] ENJOY [SPACE] YOU [ST]

(4 [ST]) R [SPACE] DINNER. [ST] [AT/TL]

Journal Print

■ Display Message Programming (Submode 31)

This programming is used to set a display message which is displayed in the 16-digit dot window provided to

the customer display and the LCD operator display while the mode lock of the register is in “LOCK” position. A

display message can be used for information, welcome greeting, etc.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale When you enter 31 and depress the [X] key,

the screen shown below will appear.

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

P31

DISPLAY MSG

#01

WE SERVE THE CHO

#02

ICEST FOOD.

#03

PLEASE ENJOY YOU

#04

R DINNER.

0052 17:59TM

NOTES: 1. You can select either of two features; “Scrolling Display; initial setting” or “16 Characters Held

Display”. If you select the feature “16 Characters Held Display”, refer to the section 9.2 Store

Message Display on page 9-2 (Operator’s Guide) to display each message.

2. When the “SCROLLING DISPLAY” feature is selected, a maximum of 64 characters can be

entered consecutively after designating Line No. 1 at first and depressing [ST] for each line end.

3. A character must be regular-sized only.

4. A DISPLAY MESSAGE set here will also appear in the REG or MGR mode if so selected by a

program option.

5. A message display on the LCD operator display is possible when the feature “16 Characters Held

Display” has been selected.

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-41

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

35 [X] 1 [ST] |Limit Amount| [#] [AT/TL]

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING LIMIT TABLE

01 DISC 0.00

Please input item No.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

Max. 6 digits

Enter 0 to reset the limt.

ex.) To set $5.00 as a limit amount

Mode Lock: SET

Enter 35, depress [X].

1 [ST] 500 [#] [AT/TL]

Journal Print

P35

LIMIT TABLE

DISC

5.00

0067 18:39TM

■ Amount Limit Setting for the [DISC] Key (Submode 35)

This programming is used to set an amount limit for the [DISC] key.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale When you enter 35 and depress the [X] key,

the screen shown below will appear.

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

NOTE: The limit set here cannot be released by the [LC OPEN] (or [OPEN]) key in transaction entries.

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-42

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING SET MENU ↓

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

Please input table No.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

■ Set Menu Table Programming (Submode 42)

This programming is used to set a Set Menu Table and their respective Sub Menu PLUs. If a PLU is

programmed with a Set Menu Table No. (Address 12 of the PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING), the PLU will be a

main menu PLU of the Set Menu Table. When the main menu PLU is entered in a sale, the sub menu PLUs

which have been programmed in the Set Menu Table will be automatically entered (Preset Set Menu), or other

PLUs can be manually entered as sub menu items (Open Set Menu).

• Programming

CONDITION Any time outside a sale When you enter 42 and depress the [X] key,

the screen shown below will appear.

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

Repeat for another table.

1 to 50 (Enter the No.

programmed to the Main

Menu PLU in Submode 4.)

*

Repeat other sub menu PLUs to be contained

in the same table. (Max. 7 PLUs)

0 to 30

* (For sequentially programming tables, the Table No. specification can be skipped.)

42 [X] |Set Menu Table No.| [NS] 1 [ST] |Sub Menu PLU Code| [PLU] [#] [AT/TL]

2 [ST] |Enterable Qty of Sub Menu PLUs| [#]

ex.) To set the following sub menu PLUs to a set menu table No. 1. Journal Print

Sub Menu PLUs: 30, 40, 50

Mode Lock: SET

Enter 42, depress [X].

1 [NS] 1 [ST] 30 [PLU] 40 [PLU]

50 [PLU] [#] [AT/TL]

P42

SET MENU

01

#01 000030

000040

000050

0072 19:40TM

NOTES: 1. To make a preset set menu, enter PLUs after the key sequence “1 [ST]” as shown above. If

changing a preset set menu into an open set menu, operate the key sequence “1 [ST] 0 [#]”

after designating the table No.

2. To make an open set menu, depress the [#] key immediately after the key sequence “1 [ST]”.

The setting of the enterable quantity of sub menu PLUs is applied only to an open set menu. If its

quantity is programmed, the set menu entry will be automatically finalized when the quantity of

sub menu PLUs reaches the programmed quantity.

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-43

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

Repeatable for other tables to be deleted.

• Deletion

CONDITION Any time outside a sale

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

42 [X] [ITEM CORR] |Set Menu Table No.| [NS] [AT/TL]

Journal Print

P42

SET MENU

02

----------------------------------------

0074 19:53TM

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING COMBO ↓

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

Please input COMBO code.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

■ Combo Sale Table Programming (Submode 43)

This programming is used to set a combo sales table.

• Programming

CONDITION Any time outside a sale When you enter 43 and depress the [X] key,

the screen shown below will appear.

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-44

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

Address 1: Combo Table Name

1 [ST]

Submode No.

43 [X]

Address 2: Grouping Item 1

2 [ST]

|Combo Table No.| [NS]

1 to 99

Character Entries [ST]

Max. 16 characters

|Grouping Item| [#]

[AT/TL]

Address 3: Grouping Item Code 1

3 [ST]

|Grouping Item Code| [#]

Address 4: Grouping Item 2

4 [ST]

|Grouping Item| [#]

Address 5: Grouping Item Code 2

5 [ST]

Address 6: Grouping Item 3

6 [ST]

|Grouping Item| [#]

Address 7: Grouping Item Code 3

7 [ST]

Address 8: Grouping Item 4

8 [ST]

|Grouping Item| [#]

Address 9: Grouping Item Code 4

9 [ST]

|Grouping Item Code| [#]

Address 10: Grouping Item 5

10 [ST]

|Grouping Item| [#]

Address 11: Grouping Item Code 5

11 [ST]

Address 12: Grouping Item 6

12 [ST]

|Grouping Item| [#]

Address 13: Grouping Item Code 6

13 [ST]

Address 14: Priority

14 [ST]

|Priority Code| [#]

Address 15:

Day-of-Week Designation

15 [ST]

|Day-of-Week Code| [#]

|Hour/Minute| [#]

|Process Value| [#]

Address 16: Start Time

16 [ST]

|Hour/Minute| [#]

Address 17: End Time

17 [ST]

Address 18: Process Status

18 [ST]

|Process Status Code| [#]

Address 19: Process Value

19 [ST]

Address 20:

Grouping Item Designation

20 [ST]

|Grouping Item Designation Code| [#]

As for details of each address,

refer to the following pages.

As for details of each address,

refer to the following page.

Repeat for another combo table.

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-45

Combo Sale Table Programming Contents

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

Address No. Description of Programming Contents

2,4,6,8,10,12 Grouping Item

Enter 1 for a department item, 2 for a PLU item. Entry of “0” will be ignored.

NOTE: Do not set a department together with a PLU which is linked to the department in the

same combo sale table.

3,5,7,9,11,13 Grouping Item Code

Enter 1 to 99 for a department item, a max. 6-digit code for a PLU item.

14 Priority Code

Enter 1 to 99. (Smaller code has a priority; 1 is the first priority.)

Entry of “0” will be ignored.

15 Day-of-Week Designation

Enter a max. 7-digit value combining the following code.

1: Sunday 5: Thursday

2: Monday 6: Friday

3: Tuesday 7: Saturday

4: Wednesday 0: No designation

ex.) When you designate Monday and Thursday, enter 25.

16,17 Start/End Time

Enter “Hour” (0 to 23), then “Minute” (00 to 59).

18 Process Status

Enter a 1-digit code from the following codes.

1: Designated Grouping Item Free of Charge

2: %- on Whole Grouping

3: Dollar Discount on Whole Grouping

4: %- on Designated Grouping Item

5: Dollar Discount on Designated Grouping Item

0: Fixed Price

19 Process Value

Effective value depends on the process status as follows.

Process Status 0: Fixed Price 0 to 999999

Process Status 2 or 4: % Rate 0 to 99.999

Process Status 3 or 5: Dollar Discount 0 to 999999

20 Grouping Designation

Enter a 1-digit value from 1 to 6.

NOTE: This address is effective when you have selected 1, 4 or 5 in the process status

selection.

ex.) To set the following to a combo table 1.

Combo Table 1: Address 1 (Combo Name): COMBO A

Address 2 (Grouping Item 1): 2 (PLU)

Address 3 (Grouping Item 1 Code): 100

Address 4 (Grouping Item 2): 2 (PLU)

Address 5 (Grouping Item 2 Code): 200

Address 6 (Grouping Item 3): 2 (PLU)

Address 7 (Grouping Item 3 Code): 300

Address 14 (Priority): 10

Address 15 (Day-of-Week Designation): 1 (Sunday)

Address 16 (Start Time): 1030 (10:30)

Address 17 (End Time): 1400 (14:00)

Address 18 (Process Status): 1 (Designated Grouping Item Free of

1 Charge)

Address 20 (Grouping Item Designation): 2 (Grouping Item 2)

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-46

Mode Lock: SET

Enter 43, depress [X].

1 [NS] 1 [ST] COMBO A [ST] (2 [ST]) 2 [#] (3 [ST]) 100 [#] (4 [ST]) 2 [#] (5 [ST]) 200 [#]

(6 [ST]) 2 [#] (7 [ST]) 300 [#] 14 [ST] 10 [#] (15 [ST]) 1 [#] (16 [ST]) 1030 [#] (17 [ST]) 1400 [#]

(18 [ST]) 1 [#] 20 [ST] 2 [#] [AT/TL]

Journal Print

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

P43

COMBO

01

#01

COMBO A

#02 2

#03 000100

#04 2

#05 000200

#06 2

#07 000300

#14 10

#15 1

#16 10:30TM

#17 14:00TM

#18 1

#20 2

0078 22:37TM

Repeatable for other tables to be deleted.

P43

COMBO

01

----------------------------------------

0079 22:50TM

• Deletion

CONDITION After Combo Sale Reset

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

43 [X] [ITEM CORR] |Combo Table No.| [NS] [AT/TL]

Journal Print

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-47

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING INVO CM MSG

1

2

3

Please input item No.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

■ Guest Check Commercial Message Programming (Submode 45)

This programming is used to set a commercial message printed on a guest check.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale When you enter 45 and depress the [X] key,

the screen shown below will appear.

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

45 [X] |Line No.| [ST]

Repeat for another line.

1 to 3

(For sequentially programming

lines, the line number

specification can be skipped.)

max. 40 characters/line

Character Entries [ST] [AT/TL]

ex.) To set a commercial message “SPECIAL LUNCH MENU FROM 11:00 TO 13:00” on the line No. 1.

Mode Lock: SET

Enter 45, depress [X].

1 [ST] SPECIAL LUNCH [SPACE] MENU [SPACE] FROM [SPACE] 11:00 [SPACE] TO [SPACE]

13:00 [ST] [AT/TL]

Journal Print

P45

INVO CM MSG

#01

SPECIAL LUNCH MENU FROM 11:00 TO 13:00

0080 23:06TM

NOTES: 1. For each line, a maximum of 40 regular-sized characters or 20 double-sized characters may be

entered. A combination of both types is also available.

2. If programming blanks for all three lines, no extra lines will be fed. If any one of the three lines is

programmed, the two other lines will result in two lines space.

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-48

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING DAY PART

01

02

03

04

05

06

Please input data.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

■ Day Part Setting (Submode 46)

A maximum of 6 day parts can be set. You can obtain major group sales data by each day part.

CONDITION After Day Part Reset When you enter 46 and depress the [X] key,

the screen shown below will appear.

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

46 [X] |Hour| |Minute| [#] [AT/TL]

Enter the time that ends

each day part, in the 24-

hour system.

Repeat until all the day parts are entered. (max. 6 day parts)

ex.) To set the following day part table.

Day Part 1: Up to 10:00*

Day Part 2: 10:01 to 14:00

Day Part 3: 14:01 to 18:00

Day Part 4: 18:01 to 22:00

* (The first day part is automatically continued from 22:01 of the preceding day.)

Mode Lock: SET

Enter 46, depress [X].

1000 [#] 1400 [#] 1800 [#] 2200 [#] [AT/TL]

Journal Print

P46

DAY PART

10:00TM

14:00TM

18:00TM

22:00TM

0083 10:40TM

NOTES: 1. A maximum of 6 day parts can be set.

2. To change the table of day parts once set, partially or entirely, do the entire setting operation over

again.

2. To reset the day parts table once set, operate:

Mode Lock: SET

46 [X] 0 [#] [AT/TL]

Then no day part sales data will be outputted on the reports.

3. Do not set a day part across 24:00, such as “from 23:00 to 1:00”. If set, no data will be processed

into that day part.

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-49

Address 1: Employee Name

1 [ST]

Submode No.

50 [X]

|Employee Code| [NS]

1 to 9999

Character Entries [ST]

Max. 12 characters

[AT/TL]

Repeat for another employee.

* Repeatable from here if an employee code is sequential.

Guest Card Reading through the MCR

Address 2: Cashier Code

2 [ST]

*

|Cashier Code| [#]

0 to 99

Address 3: Job Code

3 [ST]

|Job Code| [#]

Max. 20 digits

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING EMPLOYEE

Please input Employee code.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

■ Employee Table Setting (Submode 50)

This programming is used to assign a cashier code and a job code to each employee.

CONDITION After Employee Clock-in/Clock-out When you enter 50 and depress the [X] key,

Daily and GT Reset the screen shown below will appear.

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

Employee Table Programming Contents

Address No. Description of Programming Contents

2 Cashier Code

Enter a manager-assign code (1 to 99). A cashier for which 0 has been entered for a

cashier code cannot sign ON on the register.

NOTE: Do not set the same cashier code for multiple employees.

3 Job Code

Enter a max. 20-digit value combining the job codes 1 to 10. (When you enter a 1-digit

numeric 1 to 9, add 0 before the numeric.) As a result, a maximum of 10 job codes can be

assigned to each employee.

NOTE: Each job definition should be programmed in the Job Code/ Working Hours Setting

(Submode 51).

NOTE: A maximum of 200 employees can be managed.

ex.) To set the following to an employee No. 1.

Employee No. 1: Address 1 (Name): JONES

Address 2 (Cashier Code): 1

Address 3 (Job Code): 010203 (Job Code 1,2,3)

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-50

Journal Print

Mode Lock: SET

Enter 50, depress [X].

1 [NS] 1 [ST] JONES [ST] (2 [ST]) 1 [#] (3 [ST]) 010203 [#] [AT/TL]

Journal Print

P50

EMPLOYEE

0001

#01

JONES

#02 01

#03

010203

00005

0086 13:04TM

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

Repeatable for another employee to be deleted.

P50

EMPLOYEE

0002

----------------------------------------

00004

0091 15:53TM

• Deletion

CONDITION After Employee Clock-in/Clock-out

Daily and GT Reset

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

50 [X] [ITEM CORR] |Employee Code| [NS] [AT/TL]

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING JOB CODE ↓

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

Please input item No.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

■ Job Code/Working Hours Setting (Submode 51)

This programming is used to define each job and also set regular working hours for each job.

CONDITION After Employee Clock-in/Clock-out When you enter 51 and depress the [X] key,

Daily and GT Reset the screen shown below will appear.

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-51

Job Code Programming Contents

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

Address 1: Job Name

1 [ST]

Submode No.

51 [X]

|Job Code| [NS]

1 to 10

11 [NS]

Character Entries [ST]

Max. 12 characters

Address 2: Job Status

2 [ST]

|Job Status| [#]

0 to 3

[AT/TL]

Address 1: Daily Regular Working

Hour

1 [ST]

|Daily Regular Working Hour for each Job|

[#]

1 to 24

Address 2: Weekly Regular

Working Hour

2 [ST]

|Weekly Regular Working Hour for each Job|

[#]

1 to 99

Address 3: Time Unit

3 [ST]

|Time Unit for each Job| [#]

0 to 4

Repeat for another job.

Guest Card Reading through the MCR

Address No. Description of Programming Contents

2 Job Status

Select one status from the following.

0: Normal

1: Chief Cashier

2: Server

3: ECR Operation Prohibited

Working Hour Programming Contents

Address No. Description of Programming Contents

1 8 hours is initially set as a regular working hours for each job.

2 40 hours is initially set as a weekly working hours for each job.

3 Select one unit from the following.

0: None

1: 5 minutes unit

2: 15 minutes unit

3: 30 minutes unit

4: 60 minutes unit

ex.) To set the following.

Job Code 1: Job Code Address

Address 1 (Job Name): CASHIER

Address 2 (Job Status): 0 (Normal)

Working Hour Address

Address 1 (Daily Regular Working Hour): 7 (7 Hours)

Address 2 (Weekly Regular Working Hour): 35 (35 Hours)

Address 3 (Time Unit): 0 (None)

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-52

52 [X] |Tender Up Amount| [#] [AT/TL]

Job Code 2: Job Code Address

Address 1 (Job Name): COOK

Address 2 (Job Status): 3 (ECR Operation Prohibited)

Working Hour Address

Address 1 (Daily Regular Working Hour): 9 (9 Hours)

Address 2 (Weekly Regular Working Hour): 45 (45 Hours)

Address 3 (Time Unit): 0 (None)

Mode Lock: SET

Enter 51, depress [X].

1 [NS] 1 [ST] CASHIER [ST] (2 [ST]) 0 [#] 11 [NS] 1 [ST] 7 [#] (2 [ST]) 35 [#] (3 [ST]) 0 [#]

2 [NS] 1 [ST] COOK [ST] (2 [ST]) 3 [#] 11 [NS] 1 [ST] 9 [#] (2 [ST]) 45 [#] (3 [ST]) 0 [#] [AT/TL]

Journal Print

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

P51

JOB CODE

01

#01

CASHIER

#02 0

11

#01 7

#02 35

#03 0

02

#01

COOK

#02 3

11

#01 9

#02 45

#03 0

0089 15:43TM

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING TENDER UP

01 0.00

Please input data.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

Max. 8 digits

Repeatable for 10 amounts. (NOTE 1 on the next page)

■ Tender Up Table Setting (Submode 52)

This programming is used to set an amount table for the [TENDER UP] key. On how to use the [TENDER UP] key,

refer to section 9.30 Sale Finalization by Media Keys (Payment of A Sale) on page 9-20 (Operator’s Guide).

CONDITION Any time outside a sale When you enter 52 and depress the [X] key,

the screen shown below will appear.

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-53

P52

TENDER UP

50.00

100.00

150.00

200.00

0100 16:48TM

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

ex.) To set the following tender up table.

$50.00, $100.00, $150.00, $200.00

Mode Lock: SET

Enter 52, depress [X].

5000 [#] 10000 [#] 15000 [#] 20000 [#] [AT/TL]

Journal Print

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING MENU TABLE ↓

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

Please input table No.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

NOTES: 1. A tender up amount should be set from a smaller to a larger.

2. If a tender up table has been programmed as follows, $50.00, $100.00, $150.00, an error will

occur when you depress the [TENDER UP] key for a sales total of more than $150.

3. To reset the tender up table once set, operate as follows.

52 [X] 0 [#] [AT/TL]

■ Display Menu Table Setting (Submode 53)

This programming is used to set a display menu table corresponding to each [DISPLAY] key.

• Programming

CONDITION Any time outside a sale When you enter 53 and depress the [X] key,

the screen shown below will appear.

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

Address 1: Guest Name

1 [ST]

Submode No.

53 [X]

|Display Menu No.| [NS]

1 to 99

|PLU Code| [PLU]

Max. 6 digits

[#]

Address 2:

Charge Posting Limit

Amount for each Guest

2 [ST]

|Select Status| [#]

0: Select Allowed

1: Select Prohibited

(NOTE on the next page)

[AT/TL]

Repeat for another display menu table.

A maximum of 20 PLU items can be

entered in one display menu table.

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-54

ex.) To set the following PLU items in a display menu table No. 1.

PLU Codes 100, 105, 110, 115

Mode Lock: SET

Enter 53, depress [X].

1 [NS] 1 [ST] 100 [PLU] 105 [PLU] 110 [PLU] 115 [PLU] [#] [AT/TL]

Journal Print

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

P53

MENU TABLE

01

#01 000100

000105

000110

000115

0102 17:26TM

Repeatable for another display menu table to be deleted.

P53

MENU TABLE

05

----------------------------------------

0103 17:28TM

NOTE: Depressing the [SELECT] key in a sales transaction causes an error if the corresponding display menu

table has the “Select Prohibited” status.

• Deletion

CONDITION Any time outside a sale

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

53 [X] [ITEM CORR] |Display Menu No.| [NS] [AT/TL]

Journal Print

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-55

|Price Level| [ST] |New Preset Price| [#] [AT/TL]

60 [X] |PLU Code| [PLU]

Repeatable for other PLUs

Max. 6 digits

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING PRICE S1

Please input PLU code.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

■ PLU Preset Price Setting or Changing (Submode 60)

This programming is used to set or change each PLU price.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale When you enter 60 and depress the [X] key,

the screen shown below will appear.

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

• When a [MENU] key is depressed, a Keyboard No. will be displayed on the LCD operator display.

• After a [MENU] key is depressed, a Keyboard No. will be held until another [MENU] key is depressed.

• When the programming is completed by the [AT/TL] key depression, the Keyboard No. 1 will be

automatically regained.

To change a preset-price PLU into an open-price PLU, skip the “New Preset Price” entry and simply depress the

[#] key. Presetting a zero-price is also possible.

ex.) To change a price of the PLU Code 21 as follows. Journal Print

• $5.00 (Price Level 1)

• $2.80 (Price Level 3)

Mode Lock: SET

Enter 60, depress [X].

21 [PLU] 1 [ST] 500 [#] 3 [ST] 280 [#] [AT/TL]

[PLU Preset-code Key]

[MENU 1 to 5]

1 to 5 Max. 6 digits

Repeatable for a price change of another price level. When you

change the price of each price level in numerical order, the price level

designation can be skipped.

P60

PRICE

000021

PLU000021

#01 5.00@

#03 2.80@

0111 18:35TM

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-56

Address 1: Destination of Output (Printer Table 1)

71 [X] 1 [NS] |Destination of Output| [ST] |Terminal ID/Port No.| [#]

Address 2: Connection Status (Printer Table 1)

2 [NS] |Destination of Output| [ST] |Connection Status| [#]

Address 3: Destination of Output (Printer Table 2)

3 [NS] |Destination of Output| [ST] |Terminal ID/Port No.| [#]

Address 4: Connection Status (Printer Table 2)

4 [NS] |Destination of Output| [ST] |Connection Status| [#]

Address 5: Printer Model

5 [NS] |Port No.| [ST] |Printer| [#]

Address 6: Transmission Speed

6 [NS] |Port No.| [ST] |Transmission Speed| [#] [AT/TL]

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING PRINTER

01 OUTPUT SIDE1

02 SIDE1 STATUS

03 OUTPUT SIDE2

04 SIDE2 STATUS

05 CONNECT PRT

06 BAUD RATE

Please input item No.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

■ Printer Table Setting (Submode 71)

This programming is used to set a printer table. You can set two printer tables.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale When you enter 71 and depress the [X] key,

the screen shown below will appear.

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

When the multiple destinations are designated

*

When the multiple destinations are designated

*

When the multiple destinations are designated

When the multiple ports are designated

*

When the multiple ports are designated

* Repeatable from here if each code is sequential.

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-57

Printer Table Setting Contents

Address No. Description of Programming Contents

1, 3 Destination of Output

Destination of data output is as follows.

1: Receipt 4: RKP 3

2: RKP 1 5: RKP 4

3: RKP 2 6: Journal

Terminal ID/Port No.

Enter a 2-digit terminal ID No. and a 1-digit port No.

NOTE: If your system is the standalone system, enter only a 1-digit port No.

2, 4 Destination of Output

Destination of data output is as follows.

1: Receipt 4: RKP 3

2: RKP 1 5: RKP 4

3: RKP 2 6: Journal

Connection Status

Connection status is as follows.

0: OFF (Disconnection) 1: ON (Connection)

NOTE: When a terminal ID/port No. is entered, a connection status will be automatically set

to “ON” (Connection).

5 Port No.

Port No. is as follows.

1: Port 1

2: Port 2

3: Port 3 (Hardware Option)

Printer

A printer connectable is as follows.

1: TM-300 (Receipt, RKP 1 to 4, Journal) 3: BRST-10 (Receipt)

2: TM-T88 (Receipt, RKP 1 to 4) 0: None

6 Port No.

Port No. is as follows.

1: Port 1

2: Port 2

3: Port 3 (Hardware Option)

Transmission Speed

0: 19200 bps 1: 9600 bps

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

ex.) To set the following to a printer table 1.

Printer Table 1 Address 1 (Destination of Output): 1 (Receipt)/1 (Port 1)

2 (RKP 1)/2 (Port 2)

6 (Journal)/2 (Port 2)

Address 2 (Connection Status): 1: ON for all the destinations

Address 5 (Printer): 1 (Port 1) for 3 (BRST-10)

2 (Port 2) for 1 (TM-300)

Mode Lock: SET

Enter 71, depress [X].

1 [NS] 1 [ST] 1 [#] (2 [ST]) 2 [#] 6 [ST] 2 [#] 2 [NS] 1 [ST] 1 [#] (2 [ST]) 1 [#] 6 [ST] 1 [#] 5 [NS]

1 [ST] 3 [#] (2 [ST]) 1 [#] [AT/TL]

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-58

Journal Print

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

P71

PRINTER

1

#01 1 1

#02 1 2

#06 1 2

2

#01 1

#02 1

#06 1

5

#01 3

#02 1

0131 10:20TM

NOTE: A connection status of each RKP can also be changed by an operation in the MGR mode. For details,

refer to the section 2.5 RKP Table Change on page 2-3 of the manager’s guide.

■ %+ and %- Preset Rate Setting

A preset rate may be set on each of the [%+] and [%-] keys, one independent rate for each key. Once a rate

is preset, the % key will simply be depressed without a prior rate entry to activate the preset rate. If a rate is

entered prior to the depression of the key, the entered rate (manual rate) will be activated instead.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale When you complete the following

programming, the screen shown below will

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET appear. Depress the [ESC] key to go

back to the program menu screen.

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING MISC ↓

01 %1RATE 0%

02 %2RATE 0%

03 %3RATE 0%

04 %4RATE 0%

05 %5RATE 0%

06 %6RATE 0%

07 %7RATE 0%

08 %8RATE 0%

Please input data.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

|Preset Rate| [%+] (For Percent Charge Preset Rate)

(0.001 to 99.999 (%);

use the [ . ] key if a decimal portion is contained.)

|Preset Rate| [%-] (For Percent Discount Preset Rate)

|Preset Rate| [%3] to [%8] (For Percent Discount Preset Rates for Additional %- Keys)

...... ......

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-59

ex.) To set 10% on [%+] Key:

Mode Lock: SET

Enter 10, depress [%+].

To reset the rate once set:

Enter 0, depress the required % key.

(Then the % key will always require a manual rate entry in sale entries.)

Journal Print

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

P00

%1RATE

%+

10%

0139 10:49TM

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING MISC ↑↓

09 SI1%RATE 0%

10 SI2%RATE 0%

11 CUR RATE1 0

*

12 CUR RATE2 0

*

13 CUR RATE3 0

*

14 CUR RATE4 0

*

15 CUR RATE5 0

*

16 REG NO. #0

Please input data.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

■ Preset Rate Setting for Selective Itemizers (SI1 and SI2)

If any of [ST1/TL] (or [SI/TL]) and [SI2/TL] keys are installed on the keyboard, a preset rate may be

programmed on each key.

As for the functions and applications of the Selective Itemizers, refer to the description on the next page.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale When you complete the following

programming, the screen shown below will

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET appear. Depress the [ESC] key to go

back to the program menu screen.

|Preset Rate of SI 1| [SI1/TL] (or [SI/TL])

(0.001 to 99.999 (%);

use the [ . ] key if a decimal portion is contained.)

|Preset Rate of SI 2| [SI2/TL]

ex.) To set 7% as SI 1 preset % rate:

Mode Lock: SET

7 [ST1/TL]

...... ......

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-60

Journal Print

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

P00

SI1%RATE

SI1 TL

7%

0140 11:04TM

NOTES: 1. Whether the calculated amount by the preset SI % rate affects (i.e. add to or subtract from) the

sale total is determined by a program option.

2. To reset the rate once set, enter 0 as the rate. (Then the rate is regarded as 100% if the option

“Non-affect” is selected. With the option “SI Affects Sale Total”, some rate other than “0” should

be programmed.)

Selective Itemizer Functions and Applications

The “Selective Itemizer” is a temporary total memory for each sale and is activated separately from the Main

Itemizer (i.e. sale total memory). If certain PLU items are programmed with the SI (selective itemizer) “net” status,

the Selective Itemizer will function to add up amounts of the SI-net status items in registering the items, while the

Main Itemizer will function to add up all the items in the sale. Thus, near the sale finalization, the operator may

read the SI content by depressing the [SI/TL] key.

A preset % rate may be programmed for each of SI1 and SI2 (on the preceding page), and whether the

calculated amount will add to, subtract from, or non-affect the sale total is a program option. Whether the amount

resulted by depressing the [SI/TL] key will print or non-print is another program option.

The applications of this function may vary from store to store. Some stores may use it for counting the service

stamps to be issued to the customers according to the sale amount of service-stampable items. In this case, the

option “SI Total Non-affects Sale Total” should be selected, and a preset % rate, 1% for example, may be set to

issue one service stamp for every $1.00. Thus the number of stamps to be issued to the customer is displayed

(and printed if so programmed) as a result of calculation with the preset % rate, but the resulted value (the

number of stamps in this case) will not affect the sale total.

Example 1) With option “SI Total Non-affects Sale Total”:

Key Operation in REG Mode Receipt/Journal Print

1

PLU000001 1.00TS

1

PLU000002 1.50T

1

PLU000003 2.00TS

SI1 TL 0.03

SUBTL 4.50

PLU 1 and PLU 3 are programmed with SI-net-status. On depressing [SI/TL], “0.03” (which is 1% of total

amount of PLU 1 “1.00” + PLU 3 “2.00”) is displayed and printed, and 3 stamps are to be issued to the

customer in this case. The sale total “4.50,” is not affected by the SI calculation.

Other stores may use it for calculating the discount amount for certain sales items during a special discount sales

period by presetting the discount % rate on the SI and programming SI-net status to certain PLUs which are

subject to the special discount.

1 [PLU] (SI-net)

2 [PLU] (non-SI)

3 [PLU] (SI-net)

[SI/TL] (1% is preset)

[AT/TL]

S: SI-net Status

Number of stamps to

be issued.

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-61

Example 2) With option “SI Special Discount”:

Key Operation in REG Mode Receipt/Journal Print

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

1

PLU000001 1.00TS

1

PLU000002 1.50T

1

PLU000003 2.00TS

SI1 TL -0.30

SUBTL 4.20

1 [PLU] (SI-net)

2 [PLU] (non-SI)

3 [PLU] (SI-net)

[SI/TL] (10% is preset)

[AT/TL]

Discount Amount

resulted by SI %

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING MISC ↑↓

09 SI1%RATE 0%

10 SI2%RATE 0%

11 CUR RATE1 0

*

12 CUR RATE2 0

*

13 CUR RATE3 0

*

14 CUR RATE4 0

*

15 CUR RATE5 0

*

16 REG NO. #0

Please input data.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

On depressing [SI/TL], “-0.30” (which is 10% discount from the total amount of PLU 1 + PLU 3 items) is

displayed and printed, and that amount is subtracted from the sale total. (4.50 - 0.30 = 4.20)

■ Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Setting

In this program, the exchange rate of each foreign currencies (corresponding to the [CUR 1] to [CUR 5] keys)

will be set. By setting an exchange rate on each Foreign Currency Key, reading the sale total and tendering in

the foreign currency value will be possible for sale finalization.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale When you complete the following

programming, the screen shown below will

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET appear. Depress the [ESC] key to go

back to the program menu screen.

|Exchange Rate for Foreign Currency 1| [CUR 1]

0.000001 to 9999.999999

(Use the [ . ] key if decimal portion is contained in the rate.)

|Exchange Rate for Foreign Currency 5| [CUR 5]

As for how to calculate the Exchange Rate, see the description below.

Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Calculation

1. The rate must be calculated in the subsidiary currency unit values for both the domestic and the foreign

currencies. (In case of calculating the rate from the domestic to a foreign currency with the same zero-

suppress form, such as from American $ to French Franc, it will be no problem even if it is calculated in the

main currency of $ and Franc. However, in case of exchanging from a domestic currency such as $ or Franc

to Japanese yen or Italian Lira, or vice versa, this rule must be obeyed; otherwise a wrong rate will result.)

2. Calculation of foreign currency exchange rate is formulated as follows.

1 Foreign Currency = Domestic Currency/Rate

ex.) To obtain an exchange rate converted from the domestic currency of the Japanese ¥ into the foreign

currency American $.

When $1.00 is equal to ¥140, 1 cent = ¥140/100 cent, results in ¥1.4.

......

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

5-62

ex.) To set the rate on the preceding page for the [CUR 1] key.

Mode Lock: SET

1 [ . ] 4 [CUR 1]

Journal Print

5.4 How to Access a Program Item

P00

CUR RATE1

CUR1

1.4

*

0160 11:35TM

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAMMING MISC ↑↓

09 SI1%RATE 0%

10 SI2%RATE 0%

11 CUR RATE1 0

*

12 CUR RATE2 0

*

13 CUR RATE3 0

*

14 CUR RATE4 0

*

15 CUR RATE5 0

*

16 REG NO. #0

Please input data.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

Enter 0 to reset an exchange rate once set. You cannot use a foreign currency key of which the rate is 0.

■ Store/Register No. Setting

A maximum of 6 digits may be set as ID No. for the store and/or register. And once set, it will be printed on

every receipt and every transaction on journal.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale When you complete the following

programming, the screen shown below will

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET appear. Depress the [ESC] key to go

back to the program menu screen.

|Store/Register No.| [#]

Max. 6 digits; 0 to 999999

ex.) To set the following: Journal Print

Register No. of this terminal: 3001

OPERATION: Mode Lock: SET

3001 [#]

......

P00

REG No.

#3001

0161 11:42TM

NOTE: The preceding zeros, if entered, will not be printed. For example, if “001234” is entered in the above

operation, “#1234” will always be printed as the Register No.

6. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA

EO1-11138

6-1

6. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA

You can verify each data programmed in the preceding chapter. Two mode lock positions are available to verify

the data; SET and X. Also two ways are available to access a programmed data you want to verify; through the

operator display and through the keyboard.

6.1 How to verify a Programmed Data through the Operator Display

When you turn the mode selector key to the SET or X position, the initial screen shown below will appear.

SET Mode X Mode

6.1 How to verify a Programmed Data through the Operator Display

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 03:04

1 PROGRAMMING

2 PROGRAM READ

3 PROGRAM DLL

Please select operation by Enter key.

0.00

TOTAL

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter › ﬂ

*

X/GTX

*

02-06-1999 03:04

1 X

2 GTX

3 PROGRAM READ

4 E-JOURNAL

5 OTHERS

Please select operation by Enter key.

0.00

TOTAL

0.00

COMB1 COMB2 COMB3 EJ ﬂ

A way to access an item you want to verify is the same as that described in the section 4.1.1 How to Access a

Report Item through the Operator Display (on page 4-1 in the manager’s guide) or 5.4.1 How to Access a

Program Item through the Operator Display (on page 5-5 in the manager’s guide).

However, when you select “104 PLU”, the register will ask you which to choose “NORMAL” or “SIMPLE” as

follows.

*

X/GTX

*

02-06-1999 12:34

PROGRAM READ PLU

1 NORMAL

2 SIMPLE

Please select operation by Enter key.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter › ﬂ

• Normal Verification.............. You can verify all the programmed data of a PLU table.

• Simple Verification .............. You can verify the following data of a PLU table.

(PLU code, PLU name, tax status, link department, 1st preset price)

NOTES: 1. You can verify the following data in the address “100 MISC”.

(Preset rates for the [%], [SI/TL], [CUR] keys, tax table)

2. Addresses to verify time, date, PLU stock are not provided.

6. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA

EO1-11138

6-2

6.2 How to verify a Programmed Data through the Keyboard

You can directly access an item you want to verify through a key operation on the keyboard while the mode lock

position is in “SET” or “X”.

■ To read out the data of programming operations with a Submode No., first enter “1,” then each Submode No.,

and finally depress the [AT/TL] key.

For example, to read the programmed data entered in Submode 1 (Store Name/Message, Commercial

Message, Footer Logo Message Programming), operate:

1 0 1 [AT/TL]

Submode No. (In case of a 1-digit number, add a “0” on top to be a 2-digit number.)

Always attach “1” to the Program Submode No. for reading data.

NOTE: Key operations to verify time, date, PLU stock are not provided.

■ To verify the data of the address “100 MISC”:

1 0 0 [AT/TL]

■ To designate a zone for the PLU table verification:

1 0 4 [ST] Zone-start [X] Zone-end [PLU]

PLU Code PLU Code |

■ To verify a PLU table data by “Simple” format:

1 0 4 [PLU]

NOTE: To verify the PLU preset-code keys programmed on ECR Keyboard phase Nos. 2 to 5:

127 [ST] 2 to 5 [AT/TL]

EO1-11109

MA-1650-3 SERIES

3. M/S LEVEL

OPERATOR’S GUIDE

Table of Contents

EO1-11138

FS-2600-1 SERIES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ............................................................................1-1

2. ADDITIONAL FUNCTION KEY AND REGISTERING PROCEDURE .............2-1

1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

EO1-11138

1-1

PC

Master

Terminal

Satellite

Terminal

RS-232C

Printer

Backup Master

Terminal

Printer

Satellite

Terminal

Satellite

Terminal

RS-485

Max. 6 terminals Max. 16 terminals

A system has the following features. A system has none of the features shown left.

RKP Connection Master Terminal: 1 unit

Floating Cashier Backup Master Terminal: 1 unit

Order Entry controlled by Order Table No. Satellite Terminals: 14 units

Master Terminal: 1 unit

Backup Master Terminal: 1 unit

Satellite Terminals: 4 units

or

Master Terminal: 1 unit

Satellite Terminals: 5 units

* Printer

Receipt Printer

Journal Printer

RKP (Remote Kitchen Printer)

Printer

1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

Making the most of the functions of the previously described FS-2600 standalone, the FS-2600 can be developed

into a master-satellite system.

By connecting a PC, the system can also be expanded to a transaction data capture system.

Operational functions on each terminal ECR basically stay the same as on a standalone ECR, except those

deleted, changed, or added for this M/S system use which are described later.

2. ADDITIONAL FUNCTION KEY AND REGISTERING PROCEDURE

EO1-11138

2-1

2. ADDITIONAL FUNCTION KEY AND REGISTERING PROCEDURE

2. ADDITIONAL FUNCTION KEY AND REGISTERING

PROCEDURE

The following is the key that can be installed on the Master Terminal and Back up Master of an in-line system, in

addition to the standalone specifications, and the registering procedure using the key.

RTR (Register-to-Register) DECLARATION Key ([RTR])

RTR

■ By depressing the [RTR] key on the Master Terminal, various in-line jobs

(DLLs, Consolidated Read/Reset Report takings, etc.) can be performed.

PROCEDURE ON A MASTER TERMINAL FOR RTR DECLARATION

Mode Lock: SET, X, Z or MGR/Anytime outside a sale

Depress [RTR].

NOTES: 1. While a PC job is under way ( a command of ULL, DLL, or Read/Reset from the PC), the RTR

Declaration is not possible. Similarly, while the RTR Declaration is on, no PC jobs are possible.

2. While the RTR Declaration is on, no transaction entries in the REG, MGR or - mode are

possible.

3. While the RTR Declaration is on, no Backup Data Check is performed.

4. While the RTR Declaration is on, the following jobs are operable.

• Programming Operations

• DLL Operations (DLL to Satellite Terminals)

• Consolidated Read/Reset Report takings

• Manual Copying of Backup Data

5. The [RTR] key can be programmed to require Manager Intervention.

6. If the option “Auto Data Copying feature” is selected for Copying of Backup Data, the RTR

Declaration is not possible while a backup data update process is under way.

7. If the option “Compulsion of Data Sending to PC” is selected, the RTR Declaration is not possible

until the reset data (the consolidation data) transmission to the PC is completed.

■ By depressing the [RTR] key on the Master Terminal while the RTR Declaration is on, the RTR Declaration

ON status is canceled.

When the [RTR] key is depressed to declare “RTR ON”, the following indicator will appear on the LCD

operator display.

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04

RTR S1

RTR Declaration

Indicator

Please input cashier code

TOTAL

0.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

2. ADDITIONAL FUNCTION KEY AND REGISTERING PROCEDURE

EO1-11138

2-2

PROCEDURE ON A MASTER TERMINAL FOR RTR DECLARATION CANCEL

Mode Lock: SET, X, Z or MGR/RTR Declaration is ON

Depress [RTR].

NOTE: If the RTR declaration cancel is performed while a backup error flag is ON, a copy process of a backup

data will be automatically performed regardless of a program option. (Automatic Copy or Manual Copy

for Backup Data).

3. ADDITIONAL FUNCTION KEY AND REGISTERING PROCEDURE

4. M/S LEVEL

MANAGER’S GUIDE

Table of Contents

EO1-11138

FS-2600-1 SERIES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

1. OPERATIONS BEFORE IN-LINE SERVICE....................................................1-1

1.1 Terminal Open Check ......................................................................................................1-1

1.2 Terminal Designation .......................................................................................................1-2

1.3 Terminal Condition Check ...............................................................................................1-3

1.4 Printer Condition Check...................................................................................................1-4

2. READ AND RESET REPORTS ........................................................................2-1

2.1 Terminal Reports .............................................................................................................2-1

2.2 In-line Reports .................................................................................................................2-1

2.3 Operations after In-line report Taking ..............................................................................2-8

3. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS .....................................................................3-1

3.1 Programming Operations Common with Standalone ECR Level ....................................3-1

3.2 Programming Operations Added for In-line Terminals ....................................................3-2

3.3 Verification of Programmed Data Related to In-line Specifications .................................3-5

4. DLL (Down-Line-Loading) OPERATIONS .....................................................4-1

4.1 DLL Job List .....................................................................................................................4-1

4.2 Print Format of DLL Operations.......................................................................................4-2

5. PLU MAINTENANCE .......................................................................................5-1

5.1 PLU Table Addition/Change/Deletion with DLL (Submode 63) .......................................5-1

5.2 PLU Price Change with DLL (Submode 73) ....................................................................5-3

6. INQUIRY ...........................................................................................................6-1

7. BACKUP FUNCTION .......................................................................................7-1

8. DATA CAPTURE FUNCITON ..........................................................................8-1

9. MASTER AND BACKUP MASTER ALTERNATION .......................................9-1

10. TRANSMISSION ERROR...............................................................................10-1

10.1 Cause of Error ...............................................................................................................10-1

10.2 Error Display ..................................................................................................................10-1

10.3 Error Canceling Process ................................................................................................10-2

11. OTHER OPERATIONS RELATING TO IN-LINE SERVICE...........................11-1

11.1 Suspending ....................................................................................................................11-1

11.2 Retry ..............................................................................................................................11-1

11.3 Incomplete Ending .........................................................................................................11-1

11.4 Cancel............................................................................................................................11-1

1. OPERATIONS BEFORE IN-LINE SERVICE

EO1-11138

1-1

1.1 Terminal Open Check

1. OPERATIONS BEFORE IN-LINE SERVICE

Before entering in-line service operations (In-line Report takings, DLLs, etc.), the following operations are

available if necessary.

1.1 Terminal Open Check

This operation sends a dummy text to those terminals set in the Terminal Connection Table (Submode 69), and

prints out the Register Nos. of the disconnected terminals (i.e. terminals not responding).

CONDITION Any time outside a sale (operable on the Master Terminal)

OPERATION Mode Lock: X and RTR Declaration ON

Through the Operator Display

Select “5 OTHERS”. Select “80 T/M OPEN CHK”.

*

X/GTX

*

02-06-1999 03:04

RTR

1 X

2 GTX

3 PROGRAM READ

4 E-JOURNAL

5 OTHERS

Please select operation by Enter key.

0.00

TOTAL

0.00

COMB1 COMB2 COMB3 EJ ↓

*

X/GTX

*

02-06-1999 03:04

OTHERS RTR

80 T/M OPEN CHK

81 T/M CHK

82 PRT CHECK

90 CONSOLI READ

98 FILE VER CHK

99 INLINE LOG

Please select operation by Enter key.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

Through the Keyboard

80 [AT/TL]

Master Terminal Receipt Print

When the check result is normal: When any error status is found:

Prints the Report Name only. Prints the Register Nos. of the terminals

not connected properly, as well as the Report Name.

→

12-25-1999 SAT

#3001

****************************************

********************

X80

NOT_CONNECT

****************************************

********************

0176 07:11TM

12-25-1999 SAT

#3001

****************************************

********************

X80

NOT_CONNECT

#3002

#3003

****************************************

********************

0178 07:14TM

1. OPERATIONS BEFORE IN-LINE SERVICE

EO1-11138

1-2

1.2 Terminal Designation

This operation can be performed before any in-line service operation. When this operation is skipped, no specific

terminals are designated, i.e., the in-line service operations will be performed to all the terminals.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale (operable on the Master Terminal)

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET, X or Z (depending on the in-line service operations to follow) and RTR

Declaration ON

Through the Operator Display (NOTE 2 below)

Select “1 PROGRAMMING”. Select “T/M DESIGN”.

. . .

Enter the Register No. of a

Terminal which is subject to the in-

line service operations to follow.

Repeat for other terminals which are

subject to the in-line service operation.

NOTES: 1. The Terminal Designation once declared by the above operation will be canceled by changing

the position of the Mode Lock, or by RTR Declaration Cancel, or by turning OFF and ON the

power of the terminal. The designation is automatically canceled on completion of the operation

to follow or when a new designation is operated.

2. You should perform the terminal designation through the operator display only when an in-line

service operation to follow is that regarding the SET mode. As described in NOTE 1, the mode

lock change after designating a terminal results in the cancellation of the terminal designation you

declared.

ex.) To designate the following terminal.

Terminal ID No. 4: Register No. 3003

Mode Lock: SET, X or Z (depending on an inline-service operation to follow)/RTR Declaration ON

[#] 3003 [#] [AT/TL]

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 03:04

RTR

1 PROGRAMMING

2 PROGRAM READ

3 PROGRAM DLL

Please select operation by Enter key.

0.00

TOTAL

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 03:04

X RTR

68 PC COMM T/M DESIGN

69 CONNECT REG

70 INLINE COMM

71 PRINTER

73 PRICE CHG

77 INLINE ID

78 LOGO

TAX TABLE

Please select operation by Enter key.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

→

Through the Keyboard

[#] |Register No.| [#] [AT/TL]

1. OPERATIONS BEFORE IN-LINE SERVICE

EO1-11138

1-3

1.3 Terminal Condition Check

Journal Print

1.3 Terminal Condition Check

This operation checks the condition of the designated terminals, and prints out the status responded from the

terminals.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale (operable on Master Terminal)

OPERATION Mode Lock: X and RTR Declaration ON

Through the Operator Display

Select “5 OTHERS”. Select “81 T/M CHK”.

P00

T/M DESIGN

#04

#

3003

0189 09:26TM

*

X/GTX

*

02-06-1999 03:04

RTR

1 X

2 GTX

3 PROGRAM READ

4 E-JOURNAL

5 OTHERS

Please select operation by Enter key.

0.00

TOTAL

0.00

COMB1 COMB2 COMB3 EJ ↓

*

X/GTX

*

02-06-1999 03:04

OTHERS RTR

80 T/M OPEN CHK

81 T/M CHK

82 PRT CHECK

90 CONSOLI READ

98 FILE VER CHK

99 INLINE LOG

Please select operation by Enter key.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

→

Through the Keyboard

81 [AT/TL]

Master Terminal Receipt Print

12-25-1999 SAT

#3001

****************************************

********************

X81

T/M_CHECK

#3001 OK

#3002 NO RESPONSE

#3003 NO RESPONSE

****************************************

********************

0191 09:42TM

Status Symbol

OK: The terminal condition is normal.

NO RESPONSE: No response (power-OFF, etc.)

Blank: Other statuses

1. OPERATIONS BEFORE IN-LINE SERVICE

EO1-11138

1-4

1.4 Printer Condition Check

*

X/GTX

*

02-06-1999 03:04

RTR

1 X

2 GTX

3 PROGRAM READ

4 E-JOURNAL

5 OTHERS

Please select operation by Enter key.

0.00

TOTAL

0.00

COMB1 COMB2 COMB3 EJ ↓

*

X/GTX

*

02-06-1999 03:04

OTHERS

80 T/M OPEN CHK

81 T/M CHK

82 PRT CHECK

90 CONSOLI READ

98 FILE VER CHK

99 INLINE LOG

Please select operation by Enter key.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

→

12-25-1999 SAT

#3001

X82

X_PRT_CHECK

1

R OK

J OK

RKP1 OK

0192 10:06TM

OK: The printer condition is normal.

?: Transmission Error

OFF LINE: No response (power-OFF, etc.)

1.4 Printer Condition Check

This operation checks the conditions of the printers connected to each terminal.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale (operable on each terminal)

OPERATION Mode Lock: X

Through the Operator Display

Select “5 OTHERS”. Select “82 PRT CHECK”.

Through the Keyboard

82 [AT/TL]

Receipt Print

2. READ AND RESET REPORTS

EO1-11138

2-1

2.1 Terminal Reports

2. READ AND RESET REPORTS

2.1 Terminal Reports

Since most reports are taken as in-line reports on the Master Terminal, some of the reports which are available

on the individual standalone ECR basis cannot be taken on Master or Satellite ECRs of the in-line system. The

following are the reports which are listed in the MANAGER’S GUIDE for the standalone level but cannot be taken

on any ECRs of the in-line system. Other reports not listed below can be taken even in the in-line system. (Before

taking those reports, however, please read the next section 2.2: In-line Reports.)

TERMINAL REPORTS that cannot be taken on any ECRs of the in-line system

DAILY REPORTS GT REPORTS

REPORT NAME

CASHIER READ AND RESET REPORTS

(when adopting the Floating Cashier Feature)

• Individual Cashier Read

• Individual Cashier Reset

• All Cashier Read

• All Cashier Reset

CHECK TRACK (Guest Order Table) WITH

SALES READ AND RESET REPORTS

• Individual Cashier Read

• Individual Cashier Reset

• All Cashier Read

• All Cashier Reset

CHECK TRACK (Guest Order Table) WITHOUT

SALES READ REPORTS

• Individual Cashier

• All Cashier

EMPLOYEE CLOCK-IN/CLOCK-OUT READ AND

RESET REPORTS (Daily and Weekly)

REPORT NAME

CASHIER GT READ AND RESET REPORTS

(when adopting the Floating Cashier Feature)

• Individual Cashier GT Read

• Individual Cashier GT Reset

• All Cashier GT Read

• All Cashier GT Reset

EMPLOYEE CLOCK-IN/CLOCK-OUT GT READ

AND RESET REPORTS

2.2 In-line Reports

2.2.1 In-line Report Command Executions

Before taking in-line reports, please note the following:

1) In-line Reset Reports (as well as In-line Read Reports) can be taken on the Master Terminal as long as the

Satellite Terminals are in the idle status (“Signed OFF”condition in case of the cashier code entry type). To

check status of all the terminals connected to the in-line loop, Terminal Condition Check can be operated

(refer to Chapter 1).

2) When In-line Reports are taken, the power of each Satellite terminal must be turned ON but the Mode Lock

can be in any position.

The operation flow for taking In-line Reports is shown on the next page, and the table of In-line Reports is on the

following pages.

2. READ AND RESET REPORTS

EO1-11138

2-2

2.2 In-line Reports

WARNING!

When opening the cash drawer, be careful not to let the drawer hit any person.

The key operation for each In-line Report is the same as the corresponding terminal report available on the

standalone ECR. However, the key operation can be executed only on the Master Terminal while the [RTR] key

is turned on.

Conditions required on terminals for In-line Report takings:

Read/Reset Reports (Daily or GT)

Master Terminal: Any time outside a sale

Satellite Terminals: Signed-OFF condition (Code Entry Method)

Lock Positions Required:

Master Terminal: Mode Lock: X/RTR Declaration: ON

Mode Lock: Z/RTR Declaration: ON

Satellite Terminals: Any positions

OPERATION FLOW OF IN-LINE READ OR RESET REPORTS

Incomplete Ending: Also refer to Retry,

Suspending, and

Cancel operations.

To be operated on the

Master Terminal only

Designating

All Terminals

Designating Some Terminals

When the option Individual Terminal

Data Report Issue is selected.

(applicable to Financial Reports only).

In other cases

[#]

|Store/Register No.|

of the terminal to be

designated (max. 6 digits)

[#]

[AT/TL]

Repeat for

all the

terminals to

be designated.

Refer to

Chapter 1

Refer to the

following pages.

Report Taking Operation for Each Report (see the following pages).

Each Terminal s Report Data Collection Process

Each Terminal s

Data Print (from

Master Terminal)

End

Uncollected

Terminals

Store/Register

No. Print

Normal Ending

Consolidated

Data Report

Refer to

Chapter 11.

2. READ AND RESET REPORTS

EO1-11138

2-3

(to be continued on next page)

Report Name Mode Key Operation

Lock

COMBINATION REPORTS

• Combination 1 Read: Daily X [AT/TL]

GT X 200 [AT/TL]

• Combination 2 Read: Daily X 1 [AT/TL]

GT X 201 [AT/TL]

• Combination 3 Read: Daily X 2 [AT/TL]

GT X 202 [AT/TL]

• Combination 1 Reset: Daily Z [AT/TL]

GT Z 200 [AT/TL]

• Combination 2 Reset: Daily Z 1 [AT/TL]

GT Z 201 [AT/TL]

• Combination 3 Reset: Daily Z 2 [AT/TL]

GT Z 202 [AT/TL]

FINANCIAL REPORTS

• Financial Read: Daily X 3 [AT/TL]

GT X 203 [AT/TL]

• Financial Reset: Daily Z 3 [AT/TL]

GT Z 203 [AT/TL]

CASHIER REPORTS

(for the Floating Cashier feature) Code Entry Method:

• Individual Cashier Read: Daily X 4 [#] |Cashier ID Code| [AT/TL]

(2-digit manager-assign code)

GT X Start with 204 instead of 4 in the above pattern.

Code Entry Method:

• Individual Cashier Reset: Daily Z 4 [#] |Cashier ID Code| [AT/TL]

(2-digit manager-assign code)

GT Z Start with 204 instead of 4 in the above pattern.

• All store All Cashier Read: Daily X 4 [ST]

GT X 204 [ST]

• All store All Cashier Reset: Daily Z 4 [ST]

GT Z 204 [ST]

CASHIER REPORTS

(for the Non-Floating Cashier feature only)

• Indiv. Terminal All Cashier Read: Daily X 4 [ST]

GT X 204 [ST]

• Indiv. Terminal All Cashier Reset: Daily Z 4 [ST]

GT Z 204 [ST]

CREDIT CARD COMPANY SALES REPORTS

• Credit Card Company Sales Read: Daily X 6 [AT/TL]

GT X 206 [AT/TL]

• Credit Card Company Sales Reset : Daily Z 6 [AT/TL]

GT Z 206 [AT/TL]

DEPARTMENT GROUP REPORTS (Read only)

• Department Group Read: Daily X 8 [AT/TL]

GT X 208 [AT/TL]

MEDIA SALES AND IN-DRAWER READ

(Daily only) X 9 [AT/TL]

TABLE OF IN-LINE REPORT OPERATIONS

RTR Declaration: ON

2.2 In-line Reports

2. READ AND RESET REPORTS

EO1-11138

2-4

HOURLY RANGE REPORTS

• Hourly Read (Daily only) X 10 [AT/TL]

• Hourly Reset (Daily only) Z 10 [AT/TL]

DEPARTMENT REPORTS

• All Department Read: Daily X 11 [AT/TL]

GT X 211 [AT/TL]

• All Department Reset: Daily Z 11 [AT/TL]

GT Z 211 [AT/TL]

ALL MEDIA SALES TOTAL AND CASH-IN-

DRAWER READ (Daily only) X 12 [AT/TL]

PLU REPORTS

• All PLU Read: Daily X 13 [AT/TL]

GT X 213 [AT/TL]

• All PLU Reset: Daily Z 13 [AT/TL]

GT Z 213 [AT/TL]

• Zone PLU Read: Daily X 13 [#] → |Zone-start PLU Code|

[X] → |Zone-end PLU Code| [AT/TL]

GT X Start with 213 instead of 13 in the above pattern.

• Zone PLU Reset: Daily Z 13 [#] → |Zone-start PLU Code|

[X] → |Zone-end PLU Code| [AT/TL]

GT Z Start with 213 instead of 13 in the above pattern.

• Individual PLU Read: Daily X

(Process Reports; NOTE on page 2-5)

13 [#] → |PLU Code| [PLU] → ([ST]) [AT/TL]

Repeat for required PLUs.

GT X Start with 213 instead of 13 in the above pattern.

• Inactive PLU Read: X

(Process Reports; NOTE on page 2-5)

Daily X 13 [#] → 0 [AT/TL]

GT X Start with 213 instead of 13 in the above pattern.

PLU STOCK READ REPORTS (Daily only)

• Individual PLU Stock X

(Process Reports; NOTE page 2-5)

14 [#] → |PLU Code| [PLU] → [AT/TL]

Repeatable

• Zone PLU Stock X 14 [#] Zone-start [X] Zone-end [AT/TL]

| PLU Code | PLU Code |

• All PLU Stock X 14 [AT/TL]

CUSTOMER FILE REPORTS (Daily only)

• Individual File Read X 15 [#] |File Code| [X] [AT/TL]

• Zone File Read X 15 [#] Zone-start [X] Zone-end [AT/TL]

• Zone File Reset Z | File Code | File Code |

• All File Read X

• All File Reset Z

• Inactive File Read X

15 [#] 0 [AT/TL]

PLU GROUP REPORTS

• PLU Group Read: Daily X 24 [AT/TL]

GT X 224 [AT/TL]

• PLU Group Reset: Daily Z 24 [AT/TL]

GT Z 224 [AT/TL]

Report Name Mode Key Operation

Lock

2.2 In-line Reports

TABLE OF IN-LINE REPORT OPERATIONS

(continued)

RTR Declaration: ON

(to be continued on next page)

15 [AT/TL]

2. READ AND RESET REPORTS

EO1-11138

2-5

DAY PART REPORTS (Daily only)

• Day Part Read X

• Day Part Reset Z

CHECK TRACK (Guest Order Table)

WITH SALES REPORTS (Daily only)

• Individual Cashier Read X Code Entry Method:

• Individual Cashier Reset Z 30 [#] → |Cashier ID Code| [AT/TL]

(2-digit manager-assign code)

Cashier Key Method:

Depress the required Cashier Key, 30 [AT/TL]

• All Store All Cashier Read X

• All Store All Cashier Reset Z

CHECK TRACK (Guest Order Table)

WITHOUT SALES READ REPORTS (Daily only)

• Individual Cashier Read X Code Entry Method:

31 [#] → |Cashier ID Code| [AT/TL]

(2-digit manager-assign code)

Cashier Key Method:

Depress et the required Cashier Key, 31 [AT/TL]

• All Store All Cashier Read X

31 [ST]

COMBO SALE REPORTS (Daily only)

• Individual Combo Read X 43 [#] → |Combo Code| [#] ([ST]) → [AT/TL]

Repeatable

• All Combo Read X

• All Combo Reset Z

• All Combo Read (detail) X

• All Combo Reset (detail) Z

HOURLY COMBO SALE REPORTS (Daily only)

• Hourly Combo Sale Read X

• Hourly Combo Sale Reset Z

EMPLOYEE CLOCK-IN/CLOCK-OUT REPORTS

• Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Read: Daily X 47 [AT/TL]

Weekly X 247 [AT/TL]

GT X 248 [AT/TL]

• Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Reset: Daily Z 47 [AT/TL]

Weekly Z 247 [AT/TL]

GT Z 248 [AT/TL]

Report Name Mode Key Operation

Lock

2.2 In-line Reports

TABLE OF IN-LINE REPORT OPERATIONS

(continued)

RTR Declaration: ON

25 [AT/TL]

30 [ST]

43 [AT/TL]

43 [ST]

44 [AT/TL]

NOTE: When the “Process Report” is marked, the report can only be taken after taking another report which

consolidates the corresponding data to be based on. For further details, see the following table and

descriptions.

2. READ AND RESET REPORTS

EO1-11138

2-6

2.2 In-line Reports

Reports Collection Required before Process

Report takings Process Reports available

(CONSOLIDATION MEMORY CAPTURE: NOTE 1)

Any of the following PLU reports (NOTE2) Individual PLU Read Daily

Inactive PLU Read Daily

All PLU Read Daily

Zone PLU Read Daily

All PLU Reset Daily

Zone PLU Reset Daily

Any of the following PLU reports (NOTE2) Individual PLU Read GT

Inactive PLU Read GT

All PLU Read GT

Zone PLU Read GT

All PLU Reset GT

Zone PLU Reset GT

Either of the following PLU stock reports (NOTE 2) Individual PLU Stock Read

All PLU Stock Read

Zone PLU Stock Read

PROCESS REPORTS AND BASE REPORT DATA

The following table shows which process reports are available after which report data collections.

NOTES: 1. CONSOLIDATION MEMORY CAPTURE: When an in-line read or reset report is taken on the

Master Terminal, the consolidated data is automatically stored in the Consolidation Memory of

the Master Terminal. The consolidated data stored there is not only used as the data for a

Process Report but also sent to the PC by a command from the PC when a PC is connected.

However, Consolidation memory capturing of a PLU report and other reports cannot be

performed at the same time. Only one job for the same Report No. can be captured in the

Consolidated Memory (A Read and a Reset of the same report is regarded as one job), and it

always holds the latest consolidated data.

2. The process reports will be output based on the report data previously collected. For example,

when an “Inactive PLU Read” report is taken after a “Zone PLU Read”, only the inactive PLUs in

the designated zone will be printed on the Inactive Read Report.

2.2.2 In-line Report Print Format

IN-LINE REPORT TYPE

An in-line report can be classified into the following five types.

1. Collects data from each terminal to print a consolidation result:

Credit Card Company Sales, Department Group, Hourly Range, All Department, All/Zone PLU, All/Zone

PLU Stock, PLU Group, Day Part, Combo Sales, Hourly Combo Sales Reports

2. Collects data from each terminal to print a collection result per terminal:

Indiv. Terminal All Cashier Report (Non-floating Cashier)

3. Collects data from each terminal to print a collection result per terminal and then print the consolidation result:

Financial, Media Sales & In-drawer and All Media Sales Total & Cash-in-drawer Reports

4. Creates a process data using consolidated data and prints a report:

Indiv. PLU, Inactive PLU and Indiv. PLU Stock Reports

5. Prints data in the center file possessed by the master terminal:

Indiv./All Cashier (Floating Cashier), Guest File, Check Track with/without Sales, Employee Clock-in/

Clock-out Reports

2. READ AND RESET REPORTS

EO1-11138

2-7

2.2 IN-LINE REPORTS

RTR-Symbol

Report Name

(When designating a zone, a zone range is printed.)

For print items, refer to the similar report described in the Stand-

alone section.

Register No., Reset Count

(on Reset Report only)

RTR Symbol

Unfinished register No. and status

NO RESPONSE: No response

BUSY: The terminal is busy.

Blank: Other statuses

Consecutive No., Current Time

The print format of each report is basically the same as the format of the corresponding standalone terminal

report except that some indications are additionally printed as in-line operation job IDs.

12-25-1999 SAT

#3001

****************************************

#111101 0001Z

#222202 0001Z

#999909 0001Z

****************************************

#555505 XXXXXXXXXXXX

#666606 XXXXXXXXXXXX

0176 07:11TM

Journal Indications on Individual Terminals (when report data is collected)

Read Report Collection Indication

*

X03 FINANCIAL 22:30TM

*

Z03 FINANCIAL 22:30TM

*

= Z03 FINANCIAL 22:30TM =

Reset Report Collection Indication

Read Operation Descriptor Time of Data Collection

Reset Operation Descriptor

Time of Data Collection

Time of Clear Command Reception

......

2. READ AND RESET REPORTS

EO1-11138

2-8

2.3 Operations after In-line report Taking

The following operations are available after taking in-line reports.

2.3.1 Consolidated report Data Read (Reprint)

This operation issues the report data which is remaining in the Consolidation Memory of the Master Terminal.

OPERATION ON MASTER TERMINAL: Mode Lock: X/RTR Declaration: ON

90 [AT/TL]

When no consolidated data is remaining in the memory, this read operation is not possible.

2.3.2 Enforced Clear of Hold Condition (on Individual Terminals)

This can be operated when the HOLD condition on a terminal can by no means be cleared because the terminal

cannot receive a Clear Command from the Master Terminal for some reason (the Master Terminal becomes

down, etc. before completion of the reset report data collection).

OPERATION ON ANY TERMINAL IN HOLD CONDITION: Mode Lock: Z

9999 [AT/TL]

On operating this, the HOLD condition is cleared, and allows any key-in operations. However, this operation

is regarded as an emergency measure to cope with such trouble as the Master Terminal becomes down, etc.

and thus no other solutions can be chosen, because the sales data memory of those reports can no longer be

collected by the Master Terminal.

3. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

3-1

3.1 Programming Operations Common with Standalone ECR Level

3. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

The system should be programmed fully by your local TOSHIBA TEC representative at the time of delivery

according to the user’s requirements so that daily operations can immediately start. However, some data must be

added or changed daily or in a longer period. Since the volume of programming contents for the system is too

large, this chapter and the following two chapters are provided as guide lines of the user’s daily programming and

maintenance operations. If there are any unclear points or program data other than listed here must be changed

or added, please contact your TOSHIBA TEC representative. Please also note that some programming

operations introduced in the Standalone Level are modified or not available on in-line terminals.

3.1 Programming Operations Common with Standalone ECR Level

The following is the table of programming operations which are introduced in the Manager’s Guide for the

Standalone Level and can be operated on in-line terminals as well, with the Submode No. and operation

sequence unchanged. However, on in-line terminals, these are usually operated on the Master Terminal only and

down-line-loaded (DLLed) to all the Satellite Terminals. Therefore, if any program data is changed, a DLL is

further necessary to load the new data (after the change) to all the Satellite Terminals (to be described in the next

chapter).

PROGRAMMING JOB LIST

Master: Programming is possible on the master terminal while the RTR declaration is ON.

Satellite: Programming is possible on the master terminal (while the RTR declaration is OFF), the backup master

terminal and the satellite terminals.

O: Available

Submode Programming Job Terminal

No. Master Satellite

1 Store Name/Message, Commercial Message, Footer Logo Message O O

Programming

2 Cashier Programming O

3 Department Table Programming O

4 PLU Table Programming O

5 Time Setting or Adjustment O O

6 Date Setting or Adjustment O O

7 Hourly Range Setting O

8 Amount Limit Setting for Function Keys and Guests O O

12 Non-taxable Limit Amount and Gratuity Rate Setting O

13 Minor Group Name Programming O

14 Major Group Name Programming O

15 Customer File Table Setting O

19 Combination Report Table Programming O O

24 PLU Stock Loading or Changing O O

26 Tare Table and Scale Unit Weight Programming O

27 PLU Preset-code Key and Display Key Setting O O

WARNING!

Never try to access a program item other than those in the following list. If you access it and

mistakenly change important data, a malfunction may occur on your completed system.

3. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

3-2

3.2 Programming Operations Added for In-line Terminals

3.2.1 Terminal Connection Table Setting (Submode 69)

This submode is required for in-line services. Enter the In-line ID No. and the Register No. of each terminal

(including the Master Terminal) connected to the in-line cable.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET and RTR Declaration is ON.

(Use the SET Mode Keyboard Sheet after depressing the [RTR] key on the REG Mode

Keyboard Sheet.)

Through the Operator Display

Select “1 PROGRAMMING”. Select “69 CONNECT REG”.

Submode Programming Job Terminal

No. Master Satellite

29 PLU Group Name Programming O

30 RKP Message Programming O

31 Display Message Programming O O

35 Amount Limit Setting for the [DISC] Key O

42 Set Menu Table Programming O

43 Combo Sale Table Programming O

45 Guest Check Commercial Message Programming O O

46 Day Part Setting O

50 Employee Table Setting O

51 Job Code/Working Hour Setting O

52 Tender Up Table Setting O

53 Display Menu Table Setting O

60 PLU Preset Price Setting or Changing O

71 Printer Setting O O

No % + and % - Preset Rate Setting O O

Sub- Selective Itemizer Rate Setting O O

mode Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Setting O

Store/Register No. Setting O O

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 03:04

RTR

1 PROGRAMMING

2 PROGRAM READ

3 PROGRAM DLL

Please select operation by Enter key.

0.00

TOTAL

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 03:04

PROGRAMMING RTR

68 PC COMM T/M DESIGN

69 CONNECT REG

70 INLINE COMM

71 PRINTER

73 PRICE CHG

77 INLINE ID

78 LOGO

TAX TABLE

Please select operation by Enter key.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

→

3. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

3-3

3.2 Programming Operations Added for In-line Terminals

. . .

1 to 16

(NOTES 1 & 2 below)

Repeat for other terminals to be connected, including the Master Terminal

itself.

. . .

0 to 999999

(NOTE 2 below)

* * For sequentially programming

In-line ID Nos., the In-line ID

specification can be skipped.

ex.) To set the following.

Master Terminal ID No. 1 Register No. 3001

Satellite Terminal ID No. 3 Register No. 3002

Mode Lock: SET/RTR Declaration is ON.

69 [X]

1 [ST] 3001 [#]

3 [ST] 3002 [#]

[AT/TL]

Journal Print

Through the Keyboard

69 [X] |In-line ID No.| [ST] |Register No.| [#] [AT/TL]

P69

CONNECT REG

#01

#

3001

#03

#

3002

0196 01:52TM

NOTES: 1. In-line ID No.: Master Terminal ............................................1 (fixed)

Backup Master Terminal (if connected) ........2 (fixed)

Satellite Terminals.........................................3 to 16 (max. 14 terminals)

However, a number of the connectable terminals differs depending on your system configuration.

Refer to the chapter 1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION of the Operator’s Guide.

2. The In-line ID No. and Register No. of each terminal to be set here must be the same as those

programmed for the terminal in In-line Terminal ID Setting (Submode 77) and Store/Register No.

Setting (no submode) in Chapter 5 in the Manager’s Guide for stand-alone level.

3. To delete an individual terminal from the Terminal Connection Table, enter 0 in place of the In-

line ID No. in the above operation pattern.

4. To delete the entire Terminal Connection Table once set, operate:

69 [X] → 0 [AT/TL]

5. If a deleting operation (individual or entire deletion) is performed, the files occupied by the

deleted terminal(s) (such as Floating Cashier File, etc.) are canceled. Therefore, a deleting

operation should be performed only when the system is to be re-built or a terminal is to be

detached from the system.

3. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

3-4

3.2.2 Terminal ID Setting (Submode 77)

This submode is available for in-line terminals (including the master and backup master terminals) . It must be

operated separately on each terminal since the Terminal ID should vary from terminal to terminal. The data set in

this submode is used as the in-line address of the terminal for in-line service operations.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET and RTR Declaration is ON (for the Master Terminal)

Mode Lock: SET (for other terminals)

(Use the SET Mode Keyboard Sheet after depressing the [RTR] key on the REG Mode

Keyboard Sheet.)

Through the Operator Display

Select “1 PROGRAMMING”. Select “77 INLINE ID”.

3.2 Programming Operations Added for In-line Terminals

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 03:04

RTR

1 PROGRAMMING

2 PROGRAM READ

3 PROGRAM DLL

Please select operation by Enter key.

0.00

TOTAL

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 03:04

PROGRAMMING

68 PC COMM T/M DESIGN

69 CONNECT REG

70 INLINE COMM

71 PRINTER

73 PRICE CHG

77 INLINE ID

78 LOGO

TAX TABLE

Please select operation by Enter key.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

→

1: Master

2: Backup Master

3 to 16: Satellites

ex.) To assign Terminal ID No. 4 to a satellite terminal of the in-line system:

Mode Lock: SET

77 [X] 4 [AT/TL]

Journal Print

Through the Keyboard

77 [X] |Terminal ID No.| [AT/TL]

12-25-1999 SAT

#3001

P77

INLINE ID

04

0196 01:52TM

NOTE: Be certain not to set the same terminal ID No. to terminals on the in-line system.

If terminals with the same ID No. exist on the in-line system, malfunction may occur.

3. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

3-5

3.3 Verification of Programmed Data Related to In-line Specifications

The programmed data related to in-line specifications can be read for verification purposes.

CONDITION Anytime outside a sale (Sign OFF required under Cashier Signing Method)

OPERATION Mode Lock: X or SET

(RTR Declaration is unnecessary on the Master Terminal.)

• Terminal Connection Table.................169 [AT/TL]

• Terminal ID Setting .............................177 [AT/TL]

NOTES: 1. Verifications listed in the Manager’s Guide of the standalone level are also available on all the

terminals of the in-line system.

2. The verification of Terminal Connection Table can be executed on the Satellite Terminals after

the DLL operation.

4. DLL (Down-Line-Loading) OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

4-1

4.1 DLL Job List

4. DLL (Down-Line-Loading) OPERATIONS

In an in-line system (Master-Satellite system), most programming data are set on the Master Terminal and down-

line-loaded (DLL) to the Satellite Terminals. The DLL operations introduced in this chapter are pure DLLs, i.e.

merely loading the data programmed in the Master Terminal to Satellite Terminals. DLLs automatically performed

with programmed data changes are introduced in the next chapter. If any other DLLs not introduced in this and

next chapters are required, ask your TOSHIBA TEC representative. Please also note that Terminal Designation

(see Chapter 1) can be operated prior to a specific DLL operation, to designate Satellite Terminals that receive

the DLL.

Submode DLL Job Remarks

No.

501 Store Name/Message, Commercial Message, Footer Logo Message

Programming

502 Cashier Programming NOTE on the

504 PLU Table Programming

505 Time/Date Setting

507 Hourly Range Setting

508 Amount Limit Setting for Function Keys and Guests

512 Non-taxable Limit Amount and Gratuity Rate Setting

513 Minor Group Name Programming

514 Major Group Name Programming

519 Combination Report Table Programming

526 Tare Table and Scale Unit Weight Programming

527 PLU Preset-code Key and Display Key Setting

529 PLU Group Name Programming

530 RKP Message Programming

531 Display Message Programming

535 Amount Limit Setting for the [DISC] Key

542 Set Menu Table Programming

543 Combo Sale Table Programming

545 Guest Check Commercial Message Programming

546 Day Part Setting

552 Tender Up Table Setting

553 Display Menu Table Setting

569 Terminal Connection Table Setting

500 %+ and %- Preset Rate Setting

Selective Itemizer Rate Setting

Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Setting

WARNING!

Never try to perform a DLL operation other than those in the following list. If you perform it and

mistakenly change important data, a malfunction may occur on your completed system.

4.1 DLL Job List

4. DLL (Down-Line-Loading) OPERATIONS

EO1-11138

4-2

4.2 Print Format of DLL Operations

NOTE: DLL is possible only when the non-floating cashier feature is used.

CONDITION Terminals including the Master: Any time outside a sale

(Sign OFF condition is necessary for the Code Entry Method)

OPERATION Satellite Terminals: Any position if the power is ON

Master Terminal: Mode Lock: SET

RTR Declaration: ON

Through the Operator Display

Select “3 PROGRAM DLL”. Select a DLL item you want to perform.

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 03:04

RTR

1 PROGRAMMING

2 PROGRAM READ

3 PROGRAM DLL

Please select operation by Enter key.

0.00

TOTAL

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 03:04

PROGRAM DLL RTR ↓

590 ALL DLL 507 HOURLY

591 ALL DLL2 508 AMOUNT LIMIT

500 MISC 509 FINANCIAL

501 STORE NAME 510 PRINT L NAME

502 CASHIER 511 SYSTEM OP2

503 DEPARTMENT 512 CA TAX & TIP

504 PLU 513 MINOR GROUP

505 TIME/DATE 514 MAJOR

Please select operation and Enter key.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

→

Submode No.

Through the Keyboard

|X X X| [AT/TL]

12-25-1999 SAT

#3001

****************************************

P504

PLU

****************************************

0176 07:11TM

*

P504 PLU 22:30TM

*

Time of receiving the

DLL

4.2 Print Format of DLL Operations

Master Terminal Receipt

Satellite Terminal Journal

5. PLU MAINTENANCE

EO1-11138

5-1

5.1 PLU Table Addition/Change/Deletion with DLL (Submode 63)

5. PLU MAINTENANCE

In this chapter, adding, changing, or deleting operations related to PLU Table program data are described. These

are operated on the Master Terminal only. All of these operations are loaded into Satellite Terminals at the same

time.

5.1 PLU Table Addition/Change/Deletion with DLL (Submode 63)

This submode can be operated only on the Master Terminal in an in-line system. This submode allows additions/

changes/deletions of PLUs in the PLU Table File (generated by Submode 4 in the Manager’s Guide for stand-

alone level). The data entered in this submode is immediately loaded into Satellite Terminals, item by item.

■ Programming or Changing

CONDITION All the terminals: Anytime outside a sale

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET and RTR Declaration is ON

(Use the SET Mode Keyboard Sheet after depressing the [RTR] key on the REG Mode

Keyboard Sheet.)

Through the Operator Display

Select “63 PLU ADD/CHG” from

Select “1 PROGRAMMING”. the program menu screen.

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 03:04

RTR

1 PROGRAMMING

2 PROGRAM READ

3 PROGRAM DLL

Please select operation by Enter key.

0.00

TOTAL

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

*

SET

*

02-06-1999 03:04

PROGRAMMING RTR ↑↓

35 LIMIT TABLE 48 CUR ROUND1

38 DRAWER WNG 49 CUR ROUND2

39 REPORT NAME 50 EMPLOYEE

42 SET MENU 51 JOB CODE

43 COMBO 52 TENDER UP

44 SLIP PRINT 53 MENU TABLE

45 INVO CM MSG 60 PRICE

46 DAY PART 63 PLU ADD/CHG

Please select operation by Enter key.

0.00

Pg up Pg dw Enter ↑ ↓

→

5. PLU MAINTENANCE

EO1-11138

5-2

5.1 PLU Table Addition/Change/Deletion with DLL (Submode 63)

Through the Keyboard

[ST]

Submode No.

Executes DLL.

Operation

procedure

surrounded

by this line

is the same

as the

operation in

Submode 4.

Repeat for any

address within

the same PLU

by re-entry for

correction.

Repeat for

other

PLUs.

[PLU]

63 [X] |Address Nos| [#]

for sequential-coded item only

Address 2: PLU Name

2 [ST]

Address 1: Link Department

1 [ST]

Address 3: 1st Preset Price

3 [ST]

[ST]

Address 4: 2nd Preset Price

4 [ST]

Address 5: 3rd Preset Price

5 [ST]

|Department Code| [#]

(1 to 99)

Character Entries [ST]

max. 16 characters

|Price| [#]

(max. 6 digits)

|Price| [#]

(max. 6 digits)

|Price| [#]

(max. 6 digits)

|Price| [#]

(max. 6 digits)

|Price| [#]

(max. 6 digits)

|Unit Weight Table| [#]

1 to 11

Address 6: 4th Preset Price

6 [ST]

Address 7: 5th Preset Price

7 [ST]

|PLU Code|

Address 8: PLU Status 1

8 [ST]

Address 9: PLU Status 2

9 [ST]

[AT/TL] (to complete this submode)

Address 10: Tax Status

10 [ST]

|Status Code to ON| [#]

|Tare Table No.| [#]

1 to 9

|Tax Code| [#]

Address 17: Tare Table

17 [ST]

|Display Menu Table No.| [#]

(max. 10 digits)

|PLU Group Code| [#]

(1 to 99)

|Set Menu Table No.| [#]

(1 to 50)

Address 11: PLU Group

11 [ST]

Address 18: Unit Weight

18 [ST]

Address 12: Set Menu Table

12 [ST]

Address 13: Display Menu Table

13 [ST]

Address 14: Stock Quantity

14 [ST]

|Stock Quantity| [#]

(0 to 9999.99)

Address 15: Minimum Stock Quantity

15 [ST]

|Minimum Stock Quantity| [#]

(0 to 9999.99)

|Tax Code| [#]

(max. 4 digits)

Address 16: Takeout Tax Status

16 [ST]

5. PLU MAINTENANCE

EO1-11138

5-3

Repeatable for other PLUs

Max. 6 digits

1 to 5 Max. 6 digits

Repeatable for a price change of another price level. When you

change the price of each price level in numerical order, the price level

designation can be skipped.

5.2 PLU Price Change with DLL (Submode 73)

Repeatable for other PLUs to be deleted.

■ Deletion

CONDITION The sales data of the required PLUs are zero and all terminals are outside a sale,

programming, or report taking operations.

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET and RTR Declaration is ON

63 [X] [ITEM CORR] |PLU Code| [PLU] [AT/TL]

NOTES: 1. When the [AT/TL] key is depressed in the above operation, the master terminal sends each

satellite terminal (or the designated satellite terminals) the DLL start command to make it “HOLD”

condition. And then, the master terminal sends the DLL data to each terminal. After the DLL is

completed, the master terminal sends each terminal the DLL end command to release it from

“HOLD” condition. However, a program option allows you to perform a DLL operation even while

each terminal is not in idle status.

2. A maximum of 100 PLU tables can be added or changed in one DLL operation sequence.

5.2 PLU Price Change with DLL (Submode 73)

This DLL operation is used to change a PLU price on each price level, and send the data to each satellite terminals.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale for Master or Satellite

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET and RTR Declaration is ON

73 [X] |PLU Code| [PLU]

[PLU Preset-code Key]

[MENU 1 to 5]

|Price Level| [ST] |New Preset Price| [#] [AT/TL]

NOTES: 1. When the [AT/TL] key is depressed in the above operation, the master terminal sends each satellite terminal

(or the designated satellite terminals) the DLL start command to make it “HOLD” condition. And then, the master

terminal sends the DLL data to each terminal. After the DLL is completed, the master terminal sends each

terminal the DLL end command to release it from “HOLD” condition. However, a program option allows you

to perform a DLL operation even while each terminal is not in idle status.

2. A maximum of 100 PLU prices can be changed in one DLL operation sequence.

3. When zero is entered as the New Preset Price value, the PLU is set with a zero price. When the

New Preset Price entry is skipped and the [#] is simply depressed, it will be an open-price PLU.

6. INQUIRY

EO1-11138

6-1

6. INQUIRY

In the master-satellite system, the data files regarding the following inquiries between the master terminal and

each satellite terminal are maintained in the master terminal center file. Each time an item regarding the data files

are performed on each satellite terminal, the master terminal searches and checks the corresponding file and

responds to the inquiring terminal by sending a result. Also, when an item is finalized on the satellite terminal, the

master terminal will update the data file regarding the item.

• Cashier Occupy and Cancel Inquiry (Floating Cashier Feature)

• Check Track (Guest Order Table) Occupy and Cancel Inquiry

• Customer File (Regular Customer and New Customer) Inquiry

• Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Occupy and Cancel Inquiry

• Cashier Change Occupy and Cancel

• Receipt and Journal Print Data Transmission

• RKP Print Data Transmission

• Printer Status Check

7. BACKUP FUNCTION

EO1-11138

7-1

7. BACKUP FUNCTION

(ONLY WHEN THE BACKUP MASTER IS CONNECTED)

(1) Function

• By connecting the backup master terminal (BM) , the various files stored in the master terminal (M) can

be backed up.

• The terminal assigned to ID No. 2 will function as a backup master terminal (BM) . By programming ID

No. 2 in the terminal connection table and downloading this data to each terminal, the system will

function as a system in which the backup master terminal (BM) is connected.

• By changing terminal ID from 2 to 1, the backup master terminal (BM) will function as the master

terminal (M).

Cashier Table Program data

(When the floating cashier system is used) Sales data

Check Track (Guest Order) Table Sales data

Item Buffer Sales data

PC Transmission Information Table Program data

Employee Table Program data

Sales data

Job Code/Working Hour Table Program data

Customer File Table Program data

Sales data

NOTE: Data capture (DC) transaction files are not backed up.

• Sales data is backed up on a real-time basis.

When sales data of the master terminal (M) is updated, sales data of the backup master terminal (BM)

is updated at the same time.

• Backup data check function:

Correspondence between the center files and backup data is checked every certain period of time.

• Backup data update process:

When an error occurs in backup data, the following processing methods can be selected according to

the program option setting.

(1) Automatic data copy

When the version of the center file stored in the master terminal (M) is different from that stored

in the backup master terminal (BM) , registration jobs are automatically prohibited, the backup

data is properly exchanged.

While updating the backup data, each inquiry from the terminals may result in a “MASTER IS

BUSY” error.

(2) Manual data copy

When the version of the center file stored in the master terminal (M) is different from that of data

stored in the backup master terminal (BM) , the master terminal (M) gives a short beep at the

timing of issuing the long receipt to warn that the data is not backed up properly.

The operator should update the backup data manually.

7. BACKUP FUNCTION

EO1-11138

7-2

(2) Procedure

1) Changing Program Data (DLL from the PC)

7. BACKUP FUNCTION

PC

BM

DLL data

Response Response

Backup data

M

• When various center files from the PC are received via DLL, the master terminal (M) backs up program

data and sales data of the backup master terminal (BM) automatically and sends the result to the PC.

2) Changing Program Data (Operated on the Master Terminal)

M

Programming

Operation

• When various center files are being programmed on the master terminal (M) , the backup error flag of

the relevant file is turned on. (At this time, backup data is not updated.)

* For details about the backup error flag, refer to 5) Backup Error Flag.

* For an explanation of the backup data update process, refer to 6) Backup Data Update Process.

3) Updating Sales Data

• After each satellite terminal sends an affect data of which sales data is subject to the data backup to the

master terminal, the same data is sent to the backup master terminal and the sales data is updated.

4) Checking Backup Data

BM

Version data

Version request

M

• The master terminal (M) sends the version request command to the backup master terminal (BM) every

certain period of time and receives version information about the backup data.

• The master terminal (M) checks correspondence between the version information received from the

backup master terminal (BM) and the center files (stored in the M) . If an abnormality is found, the

backup error flag is turned on.

• When a master job is being performed on the master terminal (M) ([RTR] key turned on), or a PC job is

being performed backup data is not checked.

5) Backup Error Flag

• When there is any difference between the data stored in the master terminal (M) and the backup data

stored in the backup master terminal (BM), the master terminal (M) turns on the backup error flag of the

file in which a difference was found.

• There are the following five cases when the backup error flag is turned on.

1 The master terminal (M) changes the programming of the center files.

2 A version error is found at the backup data check.

3 The backup job fails after the center file has been downloaded from the PC.

4 Updating of the backup data fails after the center files have been reset.

5 Updating of the backup data fails after the center file (containing Read counter) has been read.

6 The backup master terminal (ID No. 2) is added to the terminal connection table.

7. BACKUP FUNCTION

EO1-11138

7-3

• While the backup error flag is on, the following operation is performed.

The master terminal (M) gives a short beep at the timing when the long receipt is printed to warn

that a backup error has occurred.

• There are two timings cases the backup error flag is turned off.

1 The backup data is properly backed up according to the backup data update process.

2 The backup master terminal (ID No. 2) is deleted from the terminal connection table.

6) Backup Data Update Process

(This is a process required when the backup data stored in the backup master terminal (BM) is not

updated properly due to an error.)

7. BACKUP FUNCTION

BM

Response

Backup data

M

• The method for processing the backup error is selected according to a program option setting. Even if

the automatic data copy operation is selected, data copy can also be performed manually.

1 Automatic data copy

When the backup error flag is on (or turned on) , the master terminal (M) automatically sends to

the backup master terminal (BM) the file in which the error has occurred, and updates the backup

data.

2 Manual data copy

The backup data is updated by the manual operations of the operator.

* When the backup data is being updated, inquiries from terminals may result in a “MASTER IS BUSY”

error.

* When a “MASTER IS BUSY” error occurs, clear the error using the [C] key. Then, update the backup

data again after the master job (backup process) is complete.

* Only the files with the backup error flag turned on are sent to the backup master terminal (BM) to

update the backup data.

* When the master job is being done on the master terminal (M) ([RTR] key is turned on), backup data is

not checked or updated.

7) Manual Copy of Backup Data

OPERATION ON MASTER TERMINAL: Mode Lock Z/RTR Declaration ON

900 [AT/TL]

8. DATA CAPTURE FUNCITON

EO1-11138

8-1

9. DATA CAPTURE FUNCITON

8.DATA CAPTURE FUNCTION

(1) Function

To make it possible to transfer data to the PC, the details of registration jobs performed on each terminal

are pooled in the master terminal (M) as transaction data.

(2) Buffering Transaction Data

When a terminal performs the finalize operation,transaction data entered in registrations is sent to the

master terminal (M). The master terminal (M) receives the transaction data and pools it in the transaction

buffer.

The transaction data is controlled usually in two buffers. One is for buffering transaction data and the other

is for collecting data from the PC. (When one buffer becomes full, or when the collection request is issued

from the PC, the buffer in use is released for the PC, and the other buffer is used for subsequent

buffering.)

(3) Collecting Transaction Data

The transaction data stored in the master terminal is sent to the PC according to the request from the PC.

If the buffer becomes full when the master terminal receives the transaction data request command from

the PC, the transaction data of the full buffer is sent to the PC. If the buffer is not full,the transaction data in

the buffer (the buffer used for buffering) is sent to the PC.

(4) Processing when the Transaction Buffer is Full

When transaction data is received from the terminal (BM, S), the master terminal checks the vacant area of

the transaction buffer. If the received transaction data cannot be stored in the buffer, the master terminal

sends to the terminal a response indicating that the buffer is full. The terminal receiving this response,

performs journal printing indicating that the transaction data is missing.

(5) Supplementary

• Only when the transaction data capture function is selected by program option, transaction data can be

sent/received and buffered.

• There is no warning reporting the remaining capacity of the transaction buffer.

• Once the transaction data collection command is issued,data in one buffer is collected.

(When data in two buffers is required,this command should be issued twice.)

9. MASTER AND BACKUP MASTER ALTERNATION

EO1-11138

9-1

10. MASTER AND BACKUP MASTER ALTERNATION

9. MASTER AND BACKUP MASTER ALTERNATION

The Backup Master Terminal can be changed to be used as the Master Terminal for an accident that the Master

Terminal becomes down, etc. And the Master Terminal can be changed to be used as the Backup Master when it

comes back from repair, etc.

To switch from the Backup Master Terminal function to the Master Terminal function:

1 Disconnect the master terminal from the line.

2 When other terminals are in registration operation, finalize and cashier sign-off, or Cashier Key to OFF

operations should be performed.

Since a transmission error occurs at this time, an inquiry job should be completed.

3 Change the backup master terminal address from 2 (BM) to 1 (M). (Therefore, the backup master terminal will

function as the master terminal.)

Refer to Terminal ID Setting (Submode 77) on Chapter 3.

4 Delete the backup master terminal from the terminal connection table on the master terminal.

(Reprogramming is required.)

Refer to Terminal Connection Table Setting (Submode 69) on Chapter 3.

5 Download the terminal connection table.

The following files are guaranteed when the recovery process is performed. If a file is used in another terminal

when the master terminal goes down, however, data stored in the terminal is not guaranteed.

• Files controlled in the master terminal (cashier file, etc.)

• PC transmission information

The following files and data are lost when the master terminal goes down.

• Transaction file for data capture

• Files controlled locally on the master terminal

• Data in the files which are used by other terminals when the master terminal goes down.

10. TRANSMISSION ERROR

EO1-11138

10-1

10. TRANSMISSION ERROR

When a terminal makes an inquiry but a communication error occurs for some reason and the inquiry to the other

station is not possible, the message “IRC CONNECT ERR” is displayed on that terminal and operation is

stopped.

When the Master Terminal cannot access the inquiring file because the Master Terminal is receiving DLL data,

the backup data is being updated between the Master and the Backup Master terminals, etc., the message

“MASTER IS BUSY” is displayed and operation is stopped.

10.1 Cause of Error

10.1.1 “IRC CONNECT ERR”

a) Communication with the other station is not possible due to a connection error (cable cut, Master

Terminal’s Power-OFF, etc.).

b) Comminication was made, but due to a text error, the other station cannot recognize it correctly.

10.1.2 “MASTER IS BUSY”

Cannot access the inquiring file due to the following causes:

a) The Master Terminal is receiving DLL data from the PC.

b) Programming operations are under way on the Master Terminal.

c) Backup data updating process is under way.

10.2 Error Display

IRC CONNECT ERR MASTER IS BUSY

10.1 Cause of Error

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

IRC CONNECT ERR 01

Terminal ID of the other station

0.00

TOTAL

0.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

MASTER IS BUSY

0.00

TOTAL

0.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

NOTE: Depressing the [C] key cancels the error status.

10. TRANSMISSION ERROR

EO1-11138

10-2

10.3 Error Canceling Process

There are two error-canceling processes in accordance with the inquiring job contents.

Type 1: Depressing the [C] key will return to the status before the inquiry.

Applicable Jobs:

• Check Track Occupy Declaration

• Check Track Sale Item Entry Inquiry

• Cashier Occupy Inquiry

• Guest Table Inquiry

• Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Occupy Inquiry

• Cashier Change Occupy Inquiry

Type 2: Depressing the [C] key will cancel the error status, displays the following message, and waits for

RETRY or CANCEL.

Applicable Jobs:

• Check Track Affect

• Check Track Table Clear

• Check Track Occupy Cancel

• Cashier Affect

• Cashier Cancel Inquiry

• Guest Table Affect

• Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Affect

• Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Cancel Inquiry

• Cashier Change Affect

• Transaction Data Send

10.3 ERROR CANCELING PROCESS

*

REG

*

02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi

P1S1

RETRY?

Please input AT/TL key.

0.00

TOTAL

0.00

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5

For Retry................... [AT/TL] (Performs re-sending to the other station.)

For Cancel ................ [X] → [ST] (Stops the inquiry, printing on journal “

**

X → ST

**

”)

NOTE: The “Cancel” in Type 2 above is only for the case that the other station is in trouble which cannot be

recovered by a Retry operation.

11. OTHER OPERATIONS RELATING TO IN-LINE SERVICE

EO1-11138

11-1

11.1 Suspending

11. OTHER OPERATIONS RELATING TO IN-LINE SERVICE

The following are other operations relating to in-line service operations.

11.1 Suspending

This is to be operated for the purpose of suspending an in-line service being executed, when any terminals remain

unserviced, and of going on to a “RETRY”, “INCOMPLETE ENDING”, or “CANCEL” operation as the next step.

OPERATION ON MASTER TERMINAL: (Same Lock positions as the in-line job being performed)

Depress [ITEM CORR] until the key-in tone is generated.

DESCRIPTION:

The SUSPENDING operation is allowed any time during an in-line service procedure.

If suspending by the [ITEM CORR] key is accepted, the Master terminal’s display indicates the number of

unserviced terminals. (SUSPENDING of a service execution of one terminal is not possible). Now a “RETRY” or

“INCOMPLETE ENDING” operation can be selected as the next step. (When no key-in operations are made in

about 10 seconds after a SUSPENDING operation, a RETRY process will automatically be executed.)

11.2 Retry

This is to be operated for the purpose of re-attempting the in-line service that has been stopped due to “TIME

OUT” or that has just been suspended by “SUSPENDING” operation.

OPERATION ON MASTER TERMINAL: (Same Lock positions as the in-line job being performed)

Depress [AT/TL].

DESCRIPTION:

The in-line service will again be attempted to the unserviced terminals. This operation is possible any number

of times after a “TIME OUT” condition or a “SUSPENDING” operation as long as any terminals remain

unserviced. (When no key-in operations are made in about 10 seconds after a SUSPENDING operation, a

RETRY process will automatically be executed.)

11.3 Incomplete Ending

This is to be operated to abandon services to unserviced terminals, and ends the in-line service with the services

to service-completed terminals only.

OPERATION MASTER TERMINAL: (Same Lock positions as the in-line job being performed)

Depress [NS].

DESCRIPTION:

If an in-line service being executed does not seem to end normally due perhaps to some abnormal status of

any Satellite Terminals after “TIME OUT”, “SUSPENDING”, and/or “RETRY” operations, the [NS] key can be

depressed to end the in-line service with only the service-completed terminals serviced and the unserviced

terminals remaining unserviced. In case of In-line X or Z Report Collection sequences, reports of only the

service-completed terminals will be issued.

11.4 Cancel

This can be operated when a SUSPENDING condition arises due to a TIME OUT or a SUSPENDING operation.

The entire in-line service being performed is canceled. This operation is effective to in-line read report operations

but not to any in-line reset report operations.

OPERATION MASTER TERMINAL: (Mode Lock: X)

Depress [X].

TEC

Toshiba TEC FS-2600-1 SERIES Manual

Product: